20203-1309 TopSolid'Design User's Guide

User's Guide
TopSolid'Design
MASTER YOUR
MANUFACTURING PROCESS
TopSolid'Design User's Guide
© 2014, Missler Software.

7, Rue du Bois Sauvage
F-91055 Evry, FRANCE
Web: http://www.topsolid.com
E-mail: info@topsolid.com
All rights reserved.
This information is subject to change without warning.

No material may be reproduced or transmitted, regardless of the manner, electronic or mechanical means
used or purpose, without formal written consent from Missler Software.
TopSolid® is a registered trademark of Missler Software.
TopSolid® is a product name of Missler Software.
The information and the software contained within this document are subject to change without prior
warning and should not be construed as a commitment by Missler Software.
The software covered by this document is supplied under license, and may only be used and duplicated
in compliance with the terms of this license.
EN v7.9.
ii Missler Software
Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................ 1
Contents ............................................................................................................................ 2
Conventions ...................................................................................................................... 2
Online Help ....................................................................................................................... 3
Installation ......................................................................................................................... 3
Start Up ............................................................................................................................. 3
Languages ........................................................................................................................ 3
Add-ins .............................................................................................................................. 4
Versions ............................................................................................................................ 4
Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................ 4
Improvements ................................................................................................................... 4
PDM ......................................................................................................... 7
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 8
Integration ......................................................................................................................... 8
Transparency .................................................................................................................... 8
TopSolid'Pdm .................................................................................................................... 8
Local Mode ........................................................................................................................ 8
Back-up ............................................................................................................................. 9
Restoration ........................................................................................................................ 9
Transfer ............................................................................................................................. 9
Projects ............................................................................................................................. 9
Project Tree ..................................................................................................................... 10
Projects Explorer ............................................................................................................. 10
Libraries .......................................................................................................................... 10
References ...................................................................................................................... 11
Favorites ......................................................................................................................... 11
Folders ............................................................................................................................ 11
Project Templates ........................................................................................................... 12
Documents ...................................................................................................................... 12
Document Templates ...................................................................................................... 12
Save ................................................................................................................................ 13
Close ............................................................................................................................... 13
Rename ........................................................................................................................... 13
Move ............................................................................................................................... 14
Copy ................................................................................................................................ 14
Delete .............................................................................................................................. 14
Document Properties ...................................................................................................... 14
Automatic Part Numbering .............................................................................................. 15
Project Properties ............................................................................................................ 15
Vaults .............................................................................................................................. 16
Purge ............................................................................................................................... 16
Archiving ......................................................................................................................... 16
Changes .......................................................................................................................... 16
History ............................................................................................................................. 17
Revisions ......................................................................................................................... 17
Life cycle ......................................................................................................................... 18
Missler Software iii

Redirections .................................................................................................................... 18
Back References ............................................................................................................. 18
Impacting ......................................................................................................................... 19
Import .............................................................................................................................. 19
Export .............................................................................................................................. 19
Packages ........................................................................................................................ 19
Viewer ............................................................................................................................. 20
Use ........................................................................................................ 23
Application ....................................................................................................................... 24
Commands ...................................................................................................................... 25
Selections ........................................................................................................................ 25
Documents ...................................................................................................................... 26
Start Page ....................................................................................................................... 27
Dialogs ............................................................................................................................ 28
Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 29
Undo ................................................................................................................................ 31
View ................................................................................................................................ 31
Compass ......................................................................................................................... 33
Options ................................................................................................. 35
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 36
Application Options ......................................................................................................... 36
Document Options .......................................................................................................... 36
Options Tree ................................................................................................................... 37
Entities .................................................................................................. 39
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 40
Entities Tree .................................................................................................................... 40
System Entities ............................................................................................................... 41
Visibility ........................................................................................................................... 41
Name ............................................................................................................................... 41
Information ...................................................................................................................... 42
Deleting ........................................................................................................................... 42
Operations ............................................................................................ 43
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 44
Operations Tree .............................................................................................................. 44
Commands ...................................................................................................................... 45
Deactivation .................................................................................................................... 45
Condition ......................................................................................................................... 46
Basification ...................................................................................................................... 46
Replacement ................................................................................................................... 46
Insertion .......................................................................................................................... 46
Move ............................................................................................................................... 47
Folders ............................................................................................................................ 47
Editing ............................................................................................................................. 48
Stages ............................................................................................................................. 48
Invalid .............................................................................................................................. 50
iv Missler Software
Update ............................................................................................................................. 51
Rebuilding ....................................................................................................................... 52
Refreshing ....................................................................................................................... 52
Synchronization ............................................................................................................... 52
Generation ...................................................................................................................... 53
Tolerances ...................................................................................................................... 53
Visualization ......................................................................................... 55
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 56
Tolerances ...................................................................................................................... 56
Attributes ......................................................................................................................... 56
Colors .............................................................................................................................. 57
Transparency .................................................................................................................. 57
Layers ............................................................................................................................. 57
Default Attributes ............................................................................................................. 57
Forced Wireframe Render Modes ................................................................................... 58
Cameras .......................................................................................................................... 58
Cuts ................................................................................................................................. 58
Filters .............................................................................................................................. 58
Visualizations .................................................................................................................. 59
Tools ..................................................................................................... 61
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 62
Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 62
Real Parameters ............................................................................................................. 62
Entering Real Values ...................................................................................................... 62
Relay Parameters ........................................................................................................... 63
Tolerancing Real Values ................................................................................................. 64
Integer Parameters ......................................................................................................... 65
Entering Integer Values ................................................................................................... 65
Other Parameters ............................................................................................................ 65
User properties ................................................................................................................ 65
Points .............................................................................................................................. 66
Entering Points ................................................................................................................ 67
Axes ................................................................................................................................ 68
Entering Axes .................................................................................................................. 68
Entering Directions .......................................................................................................... 69
Planes ............................................................................................................................. 70
Entering Planes ............................................................................................................... 70
Frames ............................................................................................................................ 70
Entering Frames .............................................................................................................. 71
Transforms ...................................................................................................................... 71
Patterns ........................................................................................................................... 72
Sets ................................................................................................................................. 72
Sketches ............................................................................................... 75
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 76
Creation ........................................................................................................................... 76
Frame .............................................................................................................................. 76
Missler Software v
Coordinates ..................................................................................................................... 77
Grid ................................................................................................................................. 77
Profiles ............................................................................................................................ 78
Sections .......................................................................................................................... 79
Construction .................................................................................................................... 79
Constraints ...................................................................................................................... 80
Constraint Level .............................................................................................................. 82
Axis of Revolution ........................................................................................................... 83
Modification ..................................................................................................................... 84
Variables ......................................................................................................................... 85
Operations ....................................................................................................................... 86
Checking ......................................................................................................................... 88
Texts ............................................................................................................................... 89
Spatial Sketches .................................................................................. 91

Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 92
Planes ............................................................................................................................. 92
Input Plane ...................................................................................................................... 92
Shapes .................................................................................................. 95
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 96
Creation ........................................................................................................................... 97
Modification ..................................................................................................................... 98
Repetition ........................................................................................................................ 98
Healing ............................................................................................................................ 98
Comparison ..................................................................................................................... 99
FreeShapes ........................................................................................ 101

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 102
Conversion .................................................................................................................... 102
Modification ................................................................................................................... 103
Editing ........................................................................................................................... 104
Constraint Level ............................................................................................................ 104
Automatic Constraints ................................................................................................... 104
Extraction ...................................................................................................................... 105
Removing ...................................................................................................................... 106
Insertion ........................................................................................................................ 107
Dimensions ................................................................................................................... 107
Relations ....................................................................................................................... 107
Constructions ................................................................................................................ 107
Parts .................................................................................................... 109

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 110
Stages ........................................................................................................................... 110
Representations ............................................................................................................ 110
Materials ........................................................................................................................ 112
Coating .......................................................................................................................... 112
Fibers ............................................................................................................................ 113
Physical Properties ....................................................................................................... 113
vi Missler Software
Derived Parts ................................................................................................................ 114

Redimensionned Parts .................................................................................................. 114
Mirror Parts ................................................................................................................... 114
Symmetries ................................................................................................................... 115
Partial Parts ................................................................................................................... 115
Unsectionability ............................................................................................................. 116
Tolerancing ................................................................................................................... 116
Assemblies ......................................................................................... 119

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 120
Stages ........................................................................................................................... 120
Design Methods ............................................................................................................ 120
Inclusions ...................................................................................................................... 122
Positioning ..................................................................................................................... 122
Constraints .................................................................................................................... 123
Constraint Level ............................................................................................................ 124
Grouped Positioning ...................................................................................................... 124
Attributes ....................................................................................................................... 124
Parts Window ................................................................................................................ 125
Parts Tree ..................................................................................................................... 125
Creating In Place Parts ................................................................................................. 126
Modifying In Place Parts ............................................................................................... 128
Deleting In Place Parts .................................................................................................. 129
In Place Editing ............................................................................................................. 129
Assembly Neighborhoods ............................................................................................. 129
Assembly Contexts ....................................................................................................... 130
Modifying Parts From Within the Assembly .................................................................. 130
Special Parts ................................................................................................................. 131
Local Parts .................................................................................................................... 131
Material and Coating ..................................................................................................... 133
Physical Properties ....................................................................................................... 133
Collisions ....................................................................................................................... 134
Background Documents ................................................................................................ 134
Local Shapes ................................................................................................................ 134
Local Modifications ........................................................................................................ 135
In Place Assemblies ...................................................................................................... 135
Local Assemblies .......................................................................................................... 136
Mechanisms ....................................................................................... 137

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 138
Mechanisms .................................................................................................................. 138
Rigid Groups ................................................................................................................. 138
Joints ............................................................................................................................. 139
Overconstraint ............................................................................................................... 140
Positioning Conversion ................................................................................................. 141
Configurations ............................................................................................................... 141
Constrained Configurations ........................................................................................... 142
Nonholonomic Mechanisms .......................................................................................... 142
Inclusions ...................................................................................................................... 143
Missler Software vii

Inheritance .................................................................................................................... 143
Simulations ........................................................................................ 145

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 146
Tasks ............................................................................................................................. 146
Scenarios ...................................................................................................................... 147
Kinematics ..................................................................................................................... 148
Wireframe Kinematics ................................................................................................... 149
Forces ........................................................................................................................... 149
Starting Velocities ......................................................................................................... 149
Simulation ..................................................................................................................... 149
Collisions ....................................................................................................................... 150
Videos ........................................................................................................................... 150
Configurations ............................................................................................................... 150
Measurements .............................................................................................................. 150
Trajectories ................................................................................................................... 152
Families .............................................................................................. 153

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 154
Generics ........................................................................................................................ 154
Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 154
Catalogs ........................................................................................................................ 155
Instances ....................................................................................................................... 156
Inclusions ...................................................................................................................... 156
Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 157
Drivers ........................................................................................................................... 157
Geometric Drivers ......................................................................................................... 158
Parameterized Text ....................................................................................................... 158
Sub-families .................................................................................................................. 159
Derived Families ........................................................................................................... 160
Derived Families with Derived Generics ....................................................................... 161
Explicit Families ............................................................................................................ 161
Functions ............................................................................................ 163

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 164
Publishings .................................................................................................................... 164
Inclusions ...................................................................................................................... 165
Replacements ............................................................................................................... 166
Functions ....................................................................................................................... 167
Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 167
Providing ....................................................................................................................... 167
Libraries ........................................................................................................................ 168
Mechanisms .................................................................................................................. 168
Wizards ............................................................................................... 169

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 170
Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 171
Source ........................................................................................................................... 171
Constraints .................................................................................................................... 171
viii Missler Software

Rules ............................................................................................................................. 172

Inclusions ...................................................................................................................... 172
Destination .................................................................................................................... 173
Dedicated Wizards ........................................................................................................ 173
Processes ........................................................................................... 175

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 176
Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 176
Functions ....................................................................................................................... 176
Target ............................................................................................................................ 177
Operators ...................................................................................................................... 178
Drivers ........................................................................................................................... 178
Inclusions ...................................................................................................................... 179
Dedicated Processes .................................................................................................... 179
Drafting ............................................................................................... 181

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 182
Stages ........................................................................................................................... 182
Standard ........................................................................................................................ 182
Border ........................................................................................................................... 182
Scale ............................................................................................................................. 183
Title Blocks .................................................................................................................... 183
Templates ..................................................................................................................... 185
Sets ............................................................................................................................... 185
Projected Views ............................................................................................................ 185
Styles ............................................................................................................................ 186
Projection Modes .......................................................................................................... 187
Text from Set ................................................................................................................. 187
Detail Views .................................................................................................................. 188
Cross Section Views ..................................................................................................... 189
Hatching ........................................................................................................................ 189
Detailing ........................................................................................................................ 189
Axes .............................................................................................................................. 190
Dimensioning ................................................................................................................ 191
Tolerancing ................................................................................................................... 191
Notes ............................................................................................................................. 192
Symbols ........................................................................................................................ 193
Bill of Material ................................................................................................................ 193
Pages ............................................................................................................................ 193
Page sorter .................................................................................................................... 193
Print ............................................................................................................................... 194
Multiple print .................................................................................................................. 194
Drafting bundle .................................................................................. 195

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 196
Inclusion ........................................................................................................................ 196
Positioning and constraints ........................................................................................... 196
Drafting modification ..................................................................................................... 196
Pages ............................................................................................................................ 196
Missler Software ix
Drawings ............................................................................................. 197

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 198
Sketches ....................................................................................................................... 198
Groups .......................................................................................................................... 198
Dimensioning ................................................................................................................ 198
Modifications ................................................................................................................. 198
Drafting .......................................................................................................................... 198
Bills of Material .................................................................................. 199

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 200
Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 200
Columns ........................................................................................................................ 200
Multi-levels .................................................................................................................... 201
Simple Assemblies ........................................................................................................ 201
Export ............................................................................................................................ 201
Drafting .......................................................................................................................... 202
Indexes .......................................................................................................................... 203
Exploded ............................................................................................. 205

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 206
Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 206
Displacements ............................................................................................................... 207
Explosion Lines ............................................................................................................. 208
Reference Part .............................................................................................................. 208
Groups .......................................................................................................................... 209
Automatic Displacements .............................................................................................. 209
Existing Exploded Views ............................................................................................... 210
Drafting .......................................................................................................................... 210
Mountings ........................................................................................... 211

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 212
Exploded Views ............................................................................................................. 212
Stages ........................................................................................................................... 213
Notices .......................................................................................................................... 214
Animations .................................................................................................................... 215
Drillings .............................................................................................. 217

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 218
Primitives ....................................................................................................................... 218
Templates ..................................................................................................................... 218
Frames .......................................................................................................................... 219
Tolerances .................................................................................................................... 219
Threadings .................................................................................................................... 219
Clearance Holes ............................................................................................................ 220
Screw Spot Facings ...................................................................................................... 220
Drilling Groups .............................................................................................................. 220
Drafting .......................................................................................................................... 221
x Missler Software
Sheet Metal ......................................................................................... 223

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 224
Shapes .......................................................................................................................... 224
Parameters .................................................................................................................... 224
Creations ....................................................................................................................... 224
Lateral Faces ................................................................................................................ 225
Bends ............................................................................................................................ 225
Operations ..................................................................................................................... 225
Advanced ...................................................................................................................... 226
Unfolding Rules ............................................................................................................. 226
Unfolding ....................................................................................................................... 228
Drafting .......................................................................................................................... 230
Nesting ................................................................................................ 233

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 234
Parts to nest .................................................................................................................. 234
Supports ........................................................................................................................ 234
Nesting .......................................................................................................................... 234
Results and modifications ............................................................................................. 234
Chassis ............................................................................................... 235

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 236
Skeleton ........................................................................................................................ 236
Extruded Bars ............................................................................................................... 237
Materials ........................................................................................................................ 238
Descriptions .................................................................................................................. 238
Bill of Material ................................................................................................................ 238
Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 238
Cuts ............................................................................................................................... 240
Welds ............................................................................................................................ 241
Piping .................................................................................................. 243

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 244
Lines .............................................................................................................................. 244
Sketches ....................................................................................................................... 244
Blocks ............................................................................................................................ 248
Inserts ........................................................................................................................... 248
Drafting .......................................................................................................................... 249
Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 249
Materials ............................................................................................. 253

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 254
Parameters .................................................................................................................... 254
Bill of Material ................................................................................................................ 255
Hardness ....................................................................................................................... 255
Elasticity ........................................................................................................................ 255
Deformation ................................................................................................................... 256
Appearance ................................................................................................................... 256
Coatings ........................................................................................................................ 260
Missler Software xi
Realistic Rendering ........................................................................... 261

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 262
Lights ............................................................................................................................. 262
Shadows ....................................................................................................................... 263
Cameras ........................................................................................................................ 264
Textures ........................................................................................................................ 264
Environments ................................................................................................................ 265
Background ................................................................................................................... 266
Renderings .................................................................................................................... 267
Photorealistic Rendering ............................................................................................... 268
Rendering Server .......................................................................................................... 271
Analysis .............................................................................................. 273

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 274
Preparation .................................................................................................................... 274
Analysis ......................................................................................................................... 274
Inclusion ........................................................................................................................ 275
Wizard ........................................................................................................................... 275
Materials ........................................................................................................................ 275
Contacts ........................................................................................................................ 275
Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................................... 277
Loads ............................................................................................................................ 277
Meshes .......................................................................................................................... 277
Mesh Quality ................................................................................................................. 279
Results .......................................................................................................................... 279
Reports .......................................................................................................................... 279
Split Blocks ........................................................................................ 281

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 282
PDD Import and Preparation ......................................................................................... 282
Preparation Stage ......................................................................................................... 284
Parting Stage ................................................................................................................ 288
Modeling Stage ............................................................................................................. 297
Design Management ..................................................................................................... 299
Strip Layout Design ........................................................................... 303

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 304
Preparing the workpiece ............................................................................................... 304
Inclusion in the strip document ...................................................................................... 307
Defining the station shapes ........................................................................................... 308
Creating the strip ........................................................................................................... 312
Defining the punching operations .................................................................................. 313
Computing the merged strip and extracting the cutting forces ...................................... 314
Drafting .......................................................................................................................... 315
Insertion in the die assembly ......................................................................................... 316
Plastic Flow Analysis ........................................................................ 317

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 318
xii Missler Software

Preparation .................................................................................................................... 318

Wizard ........................................................................................................................... 318
Solver ............................................................................................................................ 320
Results .......................................................................................................................... 320
Searches ............................................................................................. 325

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 326
Window ......................................................................................................................... 326
Thumbnails .................................................................................................................... 327
Previews ........................................................................................................................ 328
Criteria ........................................................................................................................... 328
Sorting ........................................................................................................................... 329
Templates ..................................................................................................................... 330
Virtual Documents ......................................................................................................... 330
Filters ............................................................................................................................ 331
Client-Server PDM ............................................................................. 333

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 334
Installation ..................................................................................................................... 335
Users ............................................................................................................................. 335
Usage ............................................................................................................................ 335
Security ......................................................................................................................... 335
Chat ............................................................................................................................... 335
Workflows ...................................................................................................................... 335
Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 335
Glossary ............................................................................................. 337
Index ................................................................................................... 343
Missler Software xiii

xiv Missler Software

TopSolid'Design User's Guide Introduction
Introduction
Missler Software 1
Introduction TopSolid'Design User's Guide
Contents
This document explains how to make the most of TopSolid'Design (or TopSolid for short) to
perform the tasks for which it was designed, namely:
• To design mechanical parts.
• To design rigid or articulated mechanical assemblies.
• To draft mechanical assemblies and parts.
• To design molding blocks and inserts.
To use TopSolid correctly, we highly recommend reading and absorbing this document. Not
doing so may lead to improper use of the software.
Failure to apply the rules of use described below could have serious consequences that may
lead to data loss, for which Missler Software cannot be held responsible.
Additionally, a good knowledge of the product will allow for greater efficiency and additional
productivity.
Experience shows that time saved by not reading the user guide is consistently much less
than the time lost due to the direct consequence of non-optimal use of the software.
Conventions
The following describes several writing conventions applied in this document.
Click
When this document says to "click", this means to press and release the left mouse button.
(If you should click with a different button, that will be specified.)
When the document says to "double-click", this means to quickly press and release the left
mouse button twice (if you should click with a different button, that will be specified).
Menu Command
Commands are accessible by a menu, whose first level is displayed at the top of the
application window.
To launch a command, click on the arrow located to the right of the text and then on the name
of the desired command.
When referring to a menu command, the document will indicate its full path from the main
menu, separating each level by the ">" character (e.g. "Tools > Options…").
Part of the menu is accessible via the application icon at the top left of the window. In this
case, the document adds the word "TopSolid" at the first level (e.g. "TopSolid > Exit").
Another part of the menu is accessible via the "?" icon at the top right of the window. In this
case, the document adds the "?" character at the first level (e.g. "? > Help…").
The most common commands are also accessible through icons in the toolbar located below
the menu, but because this toolbar can be customized (by the "Tools > Customize…"
command), the document always uses the menu command, with a matching command in the
toolbar for quick access.
Similarly, some very commonly used commands are directly accessible in the mini-toolbar
located in the banner to the right of the application icon, where the specified commands can
again be found by their menu path.
Contextual Command
When the document refers to a contextual command that is accessible by right-clicking, it will
be explained as: right-click > name (e.g. "right-click > Delete").
2 Missler Software
Generally, a contextual command is associated with a selection, which must be made before
"right-clicking".
For example, to delete an entity, you must select it (by left-clicking) and then "right-click >
Delete".
This conforms to Windows standard practice, which will become quickly familiar to you.
Sometimes, to make the text more concise, the document simply says to "use its contextual
command..." in reference to an entity, which means to select it and "right-click >...".
Online Help
This document does not describe the detailed procedure for each command. For this
information, please use the online help available via the "? > Help…") command.
When a command is being used, it is also possible to access its online help directly by
pressing the F1 key on the keyboard.
Installation
Before continuing, we recommend installing TopSolid if you have not already done so.
TopSolid requires a computer with a standard amount of power, so most current machines
may be used. Of course, the greater the power, the easier the software is to use.
TopSolid can use several processors simultaneously for certain operations, so a
multiprocessor computer works well.
It must have at least 2 GB of memory, 100 GB of disk space for data, and a good graphics
card, (compatible with OpenGL and with at least 256 MB).
This document assumes you have performed a standard installation, as described in the
installation guide.
Start Up
The best way to learn a product is to use it, so we recommend starting the software and using
it as you read this documentation.
On first start up, the libraries selected during installation are automatically imported, which
may take a few minutes.
Next, another dialog box offers to create an initial project for storing the documents you will
end up creating as you learn the software.
Simply indicate its name (e.g. "Learning") and continue.
The name can be changed easily, so it is not important what name you give it.
Languages
TopSolid is available in multiple languages. By default, it starts up in the operating system
language.
If the language is unavailable, US English is used.
You can change the language by using the "Current Language" drop-down list in the "About
TopSolid..." dialog box.
However, the format of numeric values is defined by the operating system.
This simply means that you can configure your machine to use a period instead of a comma
as decimal separator by going to the Windows Control Panel and editing the regional
options. You would then need to customize the number format and change the " Decimal
symbol ".
Missler Software 3
Similarly, localizable unit symbols (such as "RPM") are expressed in the language defined in
the regional options of the machine.
Add-ins
The TopSolid product line consists of a platform on which add-ins are added for various
applications.
This very flexible architecture allows you to easily change your software by adding modules.
You can find the list of add-ins using the "Tools > Add-ins..." command.
This manual assumes that you have the following add-ins:
• TopSolid'Design: This add-in allows you to design mechanical parts and assemblies.
• TopSolid'Drafting: This add-in allows you to make drafts of mechanical parts and
assemblies.
• TopSolid'Fea: This add-in makes it possible to analyze mechanical finite elements.
• TopSolid'Split: This add-in allows you to create core and cavity blocks, inserts and all
others molding shapes needed to start a mold design.
• TopSolid'PlasticFlow: This add-in allows you to perform plastic flow analysis on parts.
• TopSolid'Interop: This add-in lets you import and export various file types: Parasolid,
STEP, TopSolid'GMI (TopSolid Geometry and Manufacturing Information), STL (export
only)...
• TopSolid'Interop'AutoCad: This add-in lets you import and export AutoCad (DWG and
DXF) files.
• TopSolid'Pdm: This add-in allows you to manage documents, projects, libraries and
concurrent engineering.
Versions
You can find the version of the TopSolid platform by using the "? > About TopSolid…"
command.
This command also displays the version of the main software components used.
The version of each add-in is displayed in a table through the "Tools > Add-ins… …"
command.
This information is necessary when you want to report an operating problem.
Diagnostics
When a problem is impossible to reproduce consistently, it is difficult to report, and therefore
providing a solution as it may take a lot of time.
You can sometimes find the source of the problem more quickly by launching TopSolid in
"Diagnostic" mode, which continuously runs additional tests.
This can be done by adding the "-d" option in the TopSolid launch shortcut.
This mode should not be used all the time because it slows down the application significantly.
Improvements
Missler Software conducts internal surveys and statistical analysis to improve the usability of
its products, however we know that there is nothing more valuable than the users experience.
This is why we have decided to give you the ability to improve TopSolid by sending feedback
about how you use TopSolid.
4 Missler Software
After several startups, TopSolid will offer you to join the "TopSolid Improvement Program", you
can also find a link in "? > About TopSolid" dialog.
If you join the program, we won’t ask you to answer to surveys. It’s only a background
process, that allows you to continue to work, and will seamlessly send some statistical data
about how you use TopSolid.
Missler Software strictly protects your private data. No information about your name, your
company, your projects or documents will be collected. Collected data will remain anonymous.
Unfortunately we are not able to precisely enumerate which data we collect, because they are
subject to change depending on our needs, and can be related to the internal behavior of the
software that we can’t easily explain.
Missler Software 5
6 Missler Software
TopSolid'Design User's Guide PDM
PDM
Missler Software 7
PDM TopSolid'Design User's Guide
Introduction
When you start TopSolid, you see a traditional Windows application with all the usual controls
(with a few changes to improve some things, see the "Use" chapter), which makes it easier to
learn.
There is, however, a fundamental difference between TopSolid and regular Windows
applications, namely that it has an integrated transparent PDM by default.
A PDM ("Product Data Management") is a system for securely managing data to support data
access, sharing, transfer, backup, etc.
Without PDM, all document management tasks must be performed manually using operating
system tools, which leads to lost productivity and carries a high risk of errors (which also
affects productivity because of the time needed to correct them!).
For example, simply renaming (or moving) a document can be catastrophic without a PDM,
because all of the documents referencing it will no longer be able to find it directly.
This creates lots of time bombs right away. The error will be detected when you try to load the
document that references the document whose name or location has changed.
Integration
The advantages of a PDM are unfortunately often greatly diminished by the heavy use of this
type of product.
It is possible, however, to overcome this problem by integrating the PDM within the
application, thus eliminating the needs to juggle multiple applications to carry out tasks.
An integrated PDM therefore improves both security and productivity.
There are several possible levels of integration. For example, there may be an intermediate
level where some functionalities are directly accessible from the application (integrated) while
others are accessible through a different tool (non-integrated).
Clearly, the more the PDM is integrated, the more user-friendly and efficient the system will be.
Transparency
To further simplify the system and improve productivity, we recommend making the PDM
completely transparent, when possible.
For example, triggering a menu command to modify the displayed document can automatically
create a new version of it.
Also, when you load an assembly containing a part that has been modified since the last load,
TopSolid can automatically update it by using the latest revision of the part.
With a transparent PDM, you can improve the quality of your data management without
losing productivity.
TopSolid'Pdm
TopSolid comes standard with a fully integrated and transparent PDM: TopSolid'Pdm.
For simplicity, this document abbreviates "TopSolid'Pdm" as "PDM" and specifies when it
refers to another PDM.
Local Mode
The PDM can be used in several different ways:
• Local: Once the software is installed, there is a local PDM on your machine, allowing you
to immediately manage your personal (unshared) work.
• Client-Server PDM: If you want to work in teams, it is also possible to install a server on a
8 Missler Software
dedicated machine on the network, and each user can then connect to it as a client to
access shared data.
Client-server mode is described later in the "Client-Server PDM" chapter. For now, we will
focus only on local mode.
Local mode does not require a database server to be installed. It transparently uses a
standard engine, Microsoft's "SQL Server Compact Edition".
Data managed by the local PDM is stored in various files in the directory you selected during
installation in the "Local data directory" field.
You can change the location of this data later using the "TopSolid > PDM > Configure Local
PDM..." command. Therefore, it is advisable to select an empty folder (if the path entered does
not correspond to an existing folder, a new folder is automatically created) on a drive with
sufficient disk space.
Warning: The contents of this folder will then be managed automatically by TopSolid. They
should never be modified directly due to the risk of corrupting or losing data.
Back-up
The contents of the local PDM storage directory must be backed-up regularly.
There are several possible methods, as described in the documentation for your Windows
operating system.
One simple method is to have an additional hard drive and to automatically copy the contents
of the folder to it every night using a scheduled task (e.g. the "Windows backup tool").
This way, if there is a serious problem, you can always go back to the previous version, losing
no more than a day of work.
It is also good to make a weekly copy to a separate media (e.g. a DVD), which can be useful in
the event that the computer disappears (theft, fire, etc.).
Note that TopSolid should be closed before performing a backup, and it should only be
restarted after the backup has finished.
Restoration
A backup can be restored very easily.
Simply close TopSolid, empty the local PDM storage folder, copy the contents from the backup
to the folder, and restart TopSolid.
You will then find everything as it was when you did the backup.
Transfer
If you change machines, you will have to transfer your old data to your new workstation. This
works a bit like a data restore.
First, install TopSolid on the new workstation and start it, specifying the location of the local
PDM.
Then, stop and restore the data backed up from the old workstation.
At the next startup, you will find everything as it was at the time of the backup.
Projects
Data managed by the PDM is distributed into projects.
The project corresponds to a storage unit, much like a filing cabinet would have been used a
few years ago.
Missler Software 9
A project contains documents, which may be arranged hierarchically in folders (like in

Windows file explorer).
The first thing to do to start working is to create a new project, if you haven't already done so.
Simply run the "TopSolid > File > New Project..." command and enter the name of the new
project, e.g. "Learning".
The name can be changed easily, so it is not important what name you give it.
Project Tree
Once this first project has been created, a new tab appears, showing the project's contents in
the form of a tree, similar to Windows file explorer. This is the project tree.
You can access most of the commands affecting the project from this tree (e.g. by selecting
one or more nodes and pressing the right mouse button to make the context menu appear).
The root node located at the top of the tree corresponds to the project itself. The associated
contextual commands will therefore be applied to the project. This is also the most practical
way to carry out the majority of actions concerning the project.
Later, when we say "select the project" in the project tree, this will mean the tree's root node
needs to be selected.
The other commands are located in the "TopSolid > File" and "TopSolid > PDM" submenus.
Projects Explorer
The "TopSolid > File > Projects…" command opens a projects explorer, which enables you
to access existing projects and to organize them using a folder hierarchy.
When you have many projects, it may be difficult to find one of them from its name alone,
which is why there is also the option of previewing the contents of the project.
This is done by defining one of the documents as the project's main document, which will be
used to produce the project preview. Simply select the document and use the contextual
command "Others > Main document".
When you double-click on the project preview, it opens and the main document is also
automatically opened.
Libraries
A library is like a project, and you can browse through it as you would with a normal project
using the project tree.
The "TopSolid > File > Libraries…" command opens a libraries explorer which enables you
to access existing libraries and to organize them using a folder hierarchy, just like for projects.
For example, you can open the "TopSolid Mechanical" library, expand (by clicking the "+") the
"Materials" folder, and then the "Carbon Steels" folder, then double-click on the "Steel"
document, which opens and displays the definition of the material, which you can then use to
make steel parts (see later).
Several libraries are available, and they contain various documents that you can use to save
time:
• TopSolid Mechanical: Contains essential documents (standard tolerance definitions,
standard threading, etc).
• TopSolid AFNOR Mechanical: Contains NF standard components (French standard).
• TopSolid ANSI Mechanical: Contains ANSI standard components (US standard).
• TopSolid CEN Mechanical: Contains EN standard components (European standard).
• TopSolid DIN Mechanical: Contains DIN standard components (German standard).
10 Missler Software
• TopSolid ISO Mechanical: Contains ISO standard components (international standard).

• TopSolid Textures: Contains textures permitting a Realistic Rendering.
Some libraries are optional and are only available if the corresponding option has been
checked during installation. A library can be installed later by restarting the installation and
checking the corresponding box.
The supplied libraries are read only, and cannot be modified. When updating the software, a
library may also be updated, and new documents may be displayed (importing new features
is an option and will prompt you when TopSolid restarts after updating).
Finally, some libraries are protected and can only be used when the corresponding license is
available.
You can also create your own libraries, in which you can store general usage components to
be reused in projects.
This enables you to capitalize on company expertise and brings gains in productivity fairly
rapidly.
References
To use a library in a project, the project must reference the library.
To do this, select the "References" node in the project tree, right-click and select "Reference
Library...", and then select the library to use.
As a minimum, the "TopSolid Mechanical" library and a library containing standard
components, such as the "TopSolid ISO Mechanical" library, for example, should be
referenced.
You can also reference a project from another project, which can be useful for using parts
defined in the first project in assemblies defined in the second project.
You can delete a reference by selecting it, "right-clicking > Delete…" which will then prevent
documents that are no longer referenced from being used in the project. However, existing
documents that already contained references to the project's document are still valid.
When a new project is created, it references all available libraries by default (except when
using a project template, see later), so unused references should be deleted.
Favorites
When you frequently use a library document or project document in another project, it is
helpful to declare the document as a favorite for the project.
This is done by selecting the document in the project tree, using the "Add to favorites..."
contextual command, and then selecting the project in which it should become a favorite.
A "shortcut" to the document will then appear in the project's "Favorites" folder, which will be
used in place of the document in most commands.
This saves you from having to search for the document in its original location, which can be
tedious (open library, expand folders, etc.).
Folders
A project is organized into folders, which helps sort out the documents.
To create a new folder, simply select the project, "right-click > Folder", type the name of the
folder, and click OK.
You can create subfolders in the same way by first selecting the parent folder.
Missler Software 11
Project Templates
Occasionally, several projects are created of the same type, with a similar organization
(references, folders, etc.).
It is then possible to make a project template which will serve as a basis for creating new
projects.
To do this, first create a project and organize it as desired, then select it and use the "Other >
Add to Templates" contextual command.
Existing project templates can be accessed in the projects explorer by activating the "Show
template projects" mode, in the special "My Templates" folder.
To transform a template project into a normal project, simply select it in the projects explorer
and use the "Extract Templates" contextual command, which extracts the project from the
template folder.
Instead of using the contextual commands, you can also "drag and drop" to or from the
template folder.
Documents
To create a new document, select a folder, "right-click > Document…", and choose the type
of document to create.
TopSolid manages several types of documents, each designed to represent a certain type of
object.
This typing makes it easier to use the product because TopSolid has a better understanding of
what task is being performed, so it can offer what is relevant at any time (e.g. no need to offer
commands to define kinematics when you are in the process of modeling a unitary part).
Each document type will be described in detail over the following chapters.
Frequently used document types may be accessed directly, making it possible to create a part
by simply "right-click > Part".
You can also create a new document using the "TopSolid > File > New Document..."
command. It will then be stored at the root of the project.
Some types of documents may be created from an existing document, such as drafting a part.
In this case, the existing document can be selected (e.g. the part), by "right-clicking", and
selecting the type of document to be created if it is offered (e.g. "Draft..."). The new document
will then have the same name as the existing document, and will be stored in the same folder.
Document Templates
Based on your area of activity, you may often have to use the same document option settings
(display tolerance, units, etc.). In this situation, it is useful to prepare these settings just once in
a document that will be used as a template when creating new documents.
To do this, simply use the "TopSolid > File > Templates > Open My Templates..." command,
which opens a special project, called "My Templates", in which you can create documents.
These documents will be offered as a starting point for creating new "template-based"
documents.
You may also place template documents in the "Templates" folder for each project, so that
they are available when working on a specific project.
This folder contains a "Defaults" subfolder. If you place a document template in this subfolder,
new documents of this type will automatically be created with this template, without prompting
for it during creation.
12 Missler Software
Save
After having created or modified a document, it needs to be saved.
A document that has been modified without saving shows up with a "*" symbol after its name.
To save the document, use the "TopSolid > File > Save Document" command.
Note that this causes all documents that depend on this saved document to also be saved.
That is, when you save an assembly, if it uses a part that is currently being modified, that other
part is also saved at that time.
It is also possible to save all modified documents at once by using the "TopSolid > File > Save
all" command.
The last five saves for each document are automatically stored, which allows you to go back if
you make a mistake.
You can set the number of saves to be stored by using the "Tools > Options..." command in
the "PDM" section.
You can access the most recent saves of a document by clicking on the "+" sign in front of the
document name in the project tree.
To return to a previous save, simply select it and use the "Restore Save..." popup command.
Close
When you have finished with a document, you can close it using the "TopSolid > File > Close
Document" command.
You can also click the X found at the top right of the document area, or click the document tab
with the middle mouse button.
When you close a document that needs to be saved, TopSolid asks if you would like to save it
before closing or close without saving.
If you choose the second option, all of the changes made since the last save will be lost
immediately.
It is also possible to save all modified documents at once by using the "TopSolid > File >
Close All Documents" command.
The "TopSolid > File > Close All" command saves and closes all open projects.
Rename
A document (or a folder) can be renamed by selecting it and "right-clicking > Rename".
Another method is to slowly "left-click" on it twice in order to avoid a double-click (or once by
pressing the "F2" key on the keyboard).
Changing the name is completely risk-free because, thanks to the PDM, references are not
lost between documents.
Missler Software 13
Move
You can move a document (or folder) by dragging and dropping it, like in Windows file explorer.
The order of the documents in a folder cannot be changed, however. They are listed
alphabetically.
Moving is completely risk-free because, thanks to the PDM, references are not lost between
documents.
Copy
It is also possible to select a document (or folder), by "right-clicking > Copy", select a
destination folder, and "right-click > Paste".
The new document is independent from the original and may be modified freely.
Copying is very useful when work in progress has to be very similar to something already
done...
Several documents can be copied at once by selecting them all before pasting.
When "pasting", references between the copied documents are redirected to the new
documents, i.e. if a part and its draft are copied simultaneously, the new draft will reference the
new part.
When you want to copy an assembly and all its parts, the selection process can be fairly
tedious and you risk forgetting a part.
In order to simplify this task, you can copy the assembly document alone and use the
contextual command "Paste special..." instead of "Paste". This command allows you to
expand your selection to the parts referenced by checking the appropriate boxes before
clicking "paste".
Delete
To delete a document or a folder (and its contents), simply "right-click > Delete... or press the
"Del" key.
Whatever was deleted is actually transferred to the special "Recycle Bin" folder, which is
preceded by the "+" sign when it is not empty.
It will then be possible to either empty the recycle bin by selecting it and using the "Empty
Recycle Bin..." popup command, or restore whatever was deleted by selecting it in the recycle
bin and using the "Restore..." popup command.
Document Properties
A document is characterized by a number of general properties that should be assigned to
ensure that the final product is properly managed.
Document properties are accessible using the document's "Properties..." contextual command
in the property tree, but they also correspond to document parameters that may be edited in
the parameters folder, especially for parts and assemblies (see below).
• File Size: The size of the file corresponding to the document on the disk, in number of
bytes. This property cannot be edited, it is updated when the document is saved.
• File Version: The TopSolid version used to save the file corresponding to the document on
the disk, with the 7XXYYYZZZ format, corresponding to v7.XX.YYY.ZZZ. This property
cannot be edited, it is updated when the document is saved, and is only present for native
TopSolid files, from version 7.3.
• Name: The document name helps you identify it quickly. It should be very short because it
will be displayed in the project tree and in the tab of the document window. Changing the
14 Missler Software
value of this property is equivalent to renaming the document, as discussed earlier.

• Description: The description can be longer. It is generally used to establish a bill of
material, so it should be specific or even a bit wordy.
• Part Number: The part number uniquely characterizes the object described in the
document (part, assembly, and plane) because it is a company-specific internal reference
that will typically be used in the bill of material. Two objects that should be considered as
being the same, whether on a bill of material or in manufacturing (for example, two parts
designed in place that turn out to be identical), can have the same reference. (The system
supports the non-uniqueness of the part number.)
• Complementary Part Number: An optional complementary part number. This property
allows two part numbers to be maintained for a single object: the design part number used
in the research department ("Part Number" property), and the management part number
when the object is on the market. In some organizations, just one part number is enough,
and this property is not used.
• Manufacturer: The name of the manufacturer who makes the object described in the
document, if it is not an internal design.
• Manufacturer Part Number: The part number assigned by the manufacturer to the object
described in the document, if it is not an internal design.
• Comment: A comment attached to the document.
You can also add new properties that are not available out of the box by defining the user
properties (see the "Tools chapter later on).
Automatic Part Numbering

Managing part numbers is often a difficult task, and guaranteeing that each part number is
unique can be problematic.
You can automate this task by using the "TopSolid > PDM > Manage Part Numbering..."
command, which is explained in detail in the online help.
In particular, you can make sure that any new document of a given type (e.g. parts or
assemblies) is assigned a unique part number, which can be configured based on a given
structure: prefix, suffix, numerical or alphabetical increments, etc.
Project Properties
A project is also characterized by a number of general properties from which information can
be provided.
The properties of the project are accessible using the project's "Properties..." popup command
in the project tree, which opens the project document.
They can be edited directly in the fields in the document window, but they also correspond to
document parameters that may be edited directly in the parameters folder (see below).
Some project properties are the same as for the document, so are not worth mentioning.
Others are for client management and their name is intuitive enough.
Project properties may be used in project documents, so you can enter the customer name in
the title blocks of all drafts of the same project, which will automatically be updated if changed
(see below).
Missler Software 15
Vaults
Until now, most of the services provided by the PDM have been similar to those available
through the simple Windows file explorer (except for the fact that renaming or moving
documents in folders could lead to major problems).
We will now discuss a new concept, a vault.
A vault is a place where you can securely store documents once you are satisfied with the
work performed on them.
Newly created documents are not initially in the vault. They display a "+" symbol before their
name in the project tree.
To put the document in the vault, you have to select it and "right-click > Put in vault…", then
click OK.
The "+" symbol is then replaced by a padlock, which indicates that the document is now in the
vault.
When you want to modify a document in the vault, it needs to be removed from the vault by
selecting it and "right-clicking > Take Out of the Vault for Modification…".
The padlock symbol is then replaced by a red check mark, which means the document is
being modified, until the next time it is put into the vault.
A document in the vault can be deleted using the same steps explained above for a document
not in the vault, except that it is deleted permanently only when it is put in the vault the next
time (until then, the deletion can be cancelled).
Purge
Permanently deleted documents in the vault are not automatically physically removed from the
hard disk because some of their revisions may be referenced by other documents.
They can be seen in the project tree by selecting the project, then "right-click > Show all
documents…". Permanently deleted documents are preceded by a grayed out symbol and
given a "(Deleted)" suffix.
To increase available hard disk space, they can be purged by selecting them and "right-
clicking > Delete > Purge...".
Archiving
If you want to increase hard disk space but still want to keep them, instead of deleting and
purging, you can archive rarely used documents.
Archiving involves moving document files to another media (a DVD, for example), which will
then be requested if you want to access the document.
To archive documents, use the "Delete > Archive Files..." popup command (instructions
explained in the online help).
Changes
You can view all modifications currently waiting to be stored into the vault by using the
"Changes" tools window, which can be displayed using the "TopSolid > View > Changes"
command.
The term "modification" is used here in the broad sense, meaning also the creation of new
documents, the deletion of documents, the renaming of documents, etc.
You can cancel changes underway by selecting one or more documents or folders and "right-
clicking > Cancel changes…", which results in the following:
• Documents being modified are returned to the status they were in before last being
removed from the vault.
16 Missler Software
• Documents that were in the vault and had been deleted are restored.
• Newly created documents (those with a "+" symbol) are deleted.
This function offers a new solution to easily go back to the previous state if it turns out to be
unsatisfactory.
History
You can see the history of some actions performed between two dates by using the
"TopSolid > PDM > History..." command.
The actions that can be traced include:
• Data put into the vault.
• Exports.
• Imports.
• Validations.
When you want to see all modifications made to a specific document, simply select it in the
project tree and use the "Others > History..." contextual command.
Revisions
The PDM automatically manages revisions to documents you create and modify.
There are two types of revisions :
• A minor revision corresponds to an intermediate stage of work with no physical
counterpart. In the example of a part, it has not been and will not be produced. Minor
revisions are identified using incremented numbers, starting at "0" (this may be changed
using the project contextual command "Others > Default Revision Texts..." ).
• A major revision corresponds to a finalized state. Major revisions are identified using
incremented letters, starting at "A" (this may be changed using the project contextual
command "Others > Default Revision Texts..." ).
Each time a document is modified and put into the vault, a new minor revision is created.
A document is initially in a "Design" state when it is validated using the "Validate" command
in the project tree, its current state (i.e. its latest minor revision) is considered to represent the
final version of its current major version.
When a validated part is modified, a new major revision is created, and the design cycle
restarts until the next validation.
When a new document is created, its major revision is "A", its minor revision is "0", and it is in
a "Design" state.
You can access the different versions of a document by clicking on the "+" before the
document name in the project tree.
Missler Software 17
The following is an example of a list of revisions for a part called "Part 1", with several
modifications and one validation (i.e. a version has been produced, corresponding to revision
"A", and the part is being improved as a future version "B"):
If the modifications applied in the latest revisions are unsatisfactory, you can return to a
previous revision by selecting the document and "right-clicking > Restore previous revision…".
When there are many minor revisions, it is likely that the previous ones are no longer of use. It
may then be worth removing them to save hard disk space.
To do this, use the "Delete > Purge Minor Revisions..." contextual command (instructions
explained in the online help).
For companies who want to use another revision index naming mode, the contextual
command « Others > Default Revision Texts... » on the project name allows you to choose the
characters to use for major and minor revisions of the documents.
Life cycle
In addition to the "Design" and "Validated" states, it is possible to define some "sub-states" of
them, which will allow you to manage a more refined "life cycle".
For instance, a document in "Design" state will be able to be in "Design - To be validated" sub-
state, waiting to be checked by authorised people prior to its validation.
To define sub-states, use the "TopSolid > PDM > Manage Life Cycle..." command
(instructions explained in the online help).
Then, it will be possible to change a document sub-state in the same manner as for changing
its state (the various sub-states will be proposed in the contextual sub-menu).
Redirections
When a document references another document that has several major revisions, it may be
necessary to change the reference to use another major revision. This is called a redirection.
For example, an assembly that references a part in its revision "A" will be able to be modified
to use the same part in its new version "B".
To do this, select the document to be modified in the project tree and use the "Redirection >
Redirect references..." command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
Back References
When you need to make changes to a document, you need to determine which other
documents will be impacted by the change.
You can find out which documents use a given document by using the "Back References"
contextual command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
18 Missler Software
This way, you can find out all of the assemblies using a given part or even all of the designs for
a given assembly.
Impacting
When a new major revision to a part is made, certain assemblies using this part will probably
need to be redirected to the new revision.
This means locating them by searching back references and then using the redirection
command on each one. This is referred to as impacting.
This may seem tedious when there are several assemblies to redirect!
The "Redirect Back Reference..." contextual command speeds up the process considerably
by combining both actions (instructions explained in the online help).
Import
When you receive external files, such as parts defined in STEP format, you need to import
them into TopSolid to be able to use them.
You can then select the project folder (or the project itself) where you want the imported
contents to end up, "right-click > Import / Export > Import File with Conversion...".
Depending on the optional modules you have set up, you will have different conversion types
available for various standard and proprietary file formats.
New documents created during import use the default document template for the project to
which they belong.
When you also want to save the original, pre-conversion file in the PDM (which may be
required under a subcontracting agreement) or when the file does not need to be converted
(as may be the case for a specifications document), you would then "right-click > and use the
Import / Export > Import File without Conversion... command instead.
Another faster way of importing files involves selecting them in the Windows file explorer and
to "drag and drop" into the TopSolid project tree. If a conversion is possible, you will be
prompted.
Export
Conversely, you may have to send your parts definition to external partners in a neutral file
format and therefore have to export the documents from TopSolid.
You would then simply select the document in the project tree and "right-click > Import /
Export > Export Document with Conversion...".
If your document does not need to be converted and you just need it from the vault, you can
use the "Export Document without Conversion..." command instead.
Packages
Exporting makes it possible to send documents to third parties who do not have TopSolid.
However, if the recipient has TopSolid (the same version or later), there is a better way to
share documents, using the "package" concept.
TopSolid documents (parts, assemblies, etc.) cannot be extracted from the PDM in native
format without conversion, since their management requires the PDM (particularly for the
references between documents). You can, however, group them together into a single
document that also contains some management information, called a package with a
".TopPkg" extension.
Missler Software 19
This package can then be imported into another TopSolid PDM, without conversion and
therefore without lost information.
The package makes it possible, for example, to transfer all or part of a project created in a
local PDM to the company client-server PDM (see below), and vice versa. This therefore
allows you to work offline.
The package export is done using the "Export Package..." contextual command, whose use is
detailed in the online help.
If you use it on a document selected in the project tree, the package will contain this
document, as well as any others that it requires (e.g. the package for an exported assembly
will also contain all the part definition documents).
If you use it on a project itself, the package will contain the project in its entirety.
The package import can be done through two different contextual commands: "Import
Package..." and "Import Package as Associative Copy...", which appear when either the
project or one of its folders is selected.
It is generally recommended to use the first command. With it, after importing, the documents
function as if you had created the contents of the package yourself.
The other command is for more advanced scenarios in which there is a need to send
successive versions of packages to a third party, who will then be able to import them in such
a way so as to detect which parts have been modified.
Another faster way of importing a package involves selecting the package file in the Windows
file explorer and to "drag and drop" into the TopSolid project tree. This method makes a non-
associative copy.
To import an entire project, use the "TopSolid > File > Import Project..." command, for which
the online help provides instructions.
This command retains the projects identity, thereby allowing the sending third party to make
changes and send the modified package back to the sender, who can then import it without
creating duplicates.
If, on the other hand, you want to create a different project based on an existing project
contained in a package, use the "TopSolid > File > Import Project as Separate Copy..."
command instead.
Viewer
Communication is increasingly exchanged through digital means, and the use of physical
media, such as paper drafts, is reduced as much as possible.
TopSolid allows you set up a purely digital communication channel with your partners and
customers, without them having to make an investment, by making a viewer freely available:
TopSolid'Viewer.
You are provided with this software, and you can freely distribute a copy to your partners, who
can use it free of charge. Additionally, it is available for download at www.topsolid7.com.
You can then send them packages, which they will be able to view with the viewer.
The viewer also makes it possible to do a first-level analysis, and it allows some
measurements, including diameter, distance, and angle.
To limit the size of files to send, you can create smaller packages, called "viewer packages",
which are packages in which everything not necessary for viewing has been removed. These
packages have a ".TopPkgViw" extension.
To make this type of package, check the "Export only the visualization (...)" box when you
export a package.
If you don’t want to install TopSolid’Viewer, it is possible to export a self executable
document. You just have to check the « Creates a self-executing package (creates an *.exe
20 Missler Software
file which can be read without TopSolid’Viewer) » option when you export the package. Then,
you will just have to double-click on the file to visualize it.
Missler Software 21
22 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Use
Use
Missler Software 23
Use TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Application
The application is laid out with a main window, called the application window, containing
various areas.
Application icon Main menu Title bar Working bar
Tool windows collapsed Document windows Status bar Anchored tool window
The title bar of the window displays the name of the document currently being edited (if any),
possibly followed by a "*" character to indicate that it has been modified since the last time it
was saved. It also displays the name of the current PDM connection in client-server mode
(see below) and the name of the application ("TopSolid 7").
Just below it, the main menu shows the full set of available commands. The contents of this
menu depends on the type of document undergoing editing as well as the additional modules
installed. The commands are distributed into submenus that can be accessed by clicking the
arrow to the right of the text. (You can also reach them by right-clicking on the text.)
When you click on the text portion of a submenu's tab, this causes the toolbar below it, called
the working bar, to change. The working bar then contains the icons for the most common
commands in the menu. (You can also change the toolbar by placing the mouse cursor in the
area and turning the wheel, if the mouse has one.)
Some commands are also accessible via the application icon, at the top left of the window,
and via the "?" icon to the right of the menu.
24 Missler Software
Similarly, some commands that are highly frequently used are directly accessible in the mini
toolbar located to the right of the application icon in the title bar.
The tool windows can be floating or anchored to the application window, either locked in
position or collapsible. Each one provides access to a specific functionality. Their presence is
not limited to the duration of a command's execution. They remain visible until they are
explicitly closed.
The document windows may be stacked to optimize the available space.
The status bar, located at the bottom of the window, displays a text that explains what
TopSolid is waiting for (e.g. "Select a point"), what it is doing (with a dynamic progress bar for
longer tasks), or "Ready", if it is not waiting for anything in particular.
Commands
As mentioned earlier, when referencing a menu command, it will be explained using its full
path from the main menu, separating each stage by the ">" character (e.g. "Tools >
Options…"). This is more convenient than saying "the fourth icon from the left of such-and-
such a toolbar...", not to mention that working bars may be customized.
However, for common commands that are also available more quickly through an icon in the
toolbar, it is generally better to use the icon than the main menu. Look through the different
toolbars to locate the quick-access commands.
Some commands might not be allowed at a given time, when the conditions necessary for
their use have not been met. The command is then grayed in the menu, and if it is also in a
toolbar, its icon is also grayed.
To learn about the user interface, it is useful to create a new part document, which will allow
you to explore the basics of how the product works.
To do this, run the "TopSolid > File > New document…" command, select "Part" document,
and click OK.
So that you are not stuck with an empty document, you can then run the "Shape > Primitives >
Block…" command and click OK.
You can also run some commands without using the menu or a toolbar, instead right-clicking a
selection in the graphical area.
When you do this, TopSolid finds all of the relevant commands and lists them in a context
menu that appears where you clicked. The commands are grouped by section, whose title
identifies the object on which the command operates, if you use it.
It is then possible to run a command from this menu, called a contextual command, by left-
clicking it with the mouse.
Some commands are modes that may be enabled and disabled by clicking on the command.
These mode commands generally have an icon that turns orange when the mode is enabled.
(If there is no icon, a checkmark appears when the mode is enabled.)
For example, the "TopSolid > View > Preview" command is one such command. When this
mode is enabled, a preview showing the result of the command is displayed, during which
time you can enter values. Otherwise, you see nothing until it is validated (which may be
necessary in complex cases in which the preview's calculation time is prohibitive.
To determine the effects of this mode, make a new block without a preview. (You then see that
it is much better with the preview, which is generally enabled.)
Selections
To use the contextual commands, you must first make a selection.
When you bring the mouse cursor to the graphical area and it goes over one of the block's
faces, its edges are outlined in a red and black dotted line.
Missler Software 25
This indicates that TopSolid has detected the face, which is confirmed by a detection echo.
Similarly, when the mouse cursor goes over an edge, it is then displayed in a red and white
dotted line.
In fact, every time that TopSolid detects something, it lets you know by displaying an echo,
which varies depending on the type of thing detected.
Once you are satisfied with the detection, click with the left mouse button to select the
detected item.
TopSolid confirms by displaying the selection differently, which serves as a selection echo.
Once you are satisfied with the selection, right-click (leaving the mouse cursor on the
selection) to access the relevant contextual commands.
To go more quickly, you can also make a detection and then immediately right-click, which
automatically validates the selection and brings up the context menu.
If you want to clear the current selection, press the "Esc" key or use the mouse to click in an
empty area.
If you want to make a multiple selection, you can do so by holding down the "Ctrl" key (to
keep each selection from overriding the previous one).
You can also select everything within a rectangular area by pressing the left mouse button,
moving the cursor while keeping the button pressed, and releasing the mouse button when
you have selected everything needed.
The "Visualization" menu also contains advanced selection commands for curves and areas,
whose use is described in the online help.
When selecting a shape's face, you can access commands for the face and also those for the
shape as a whole. If you only want the commands for the shape, just select them using the
entity detection.
To do this, hold down the "Shift" key, which limits detection to just full entities, as you can see
by moving the mouse cursor over the shape. The faces no longer change color, but the shape
does as a whole.
When you would like to select a face on the other side of the shape, you can rotate the view
(see later) or use what is called a turning detection, which lets you move through objects.
To select a hidden face, you can place the mouse cursor over the face, which causes it to
detect the face above it. Then press and hold the left mouse button while pressing the right
mouse button several times (which moves the detection through objects), and then release the
left button when the desired face has been detected.
After using the software for a while, this trick becomes more natural and is not troublesome.
Documents
Open documents are shown in such a way that they take up all of the available space. They
are "stacked", which each one identified by a tab showing the document name and containing
an icon to identify the document type (part, assembly, etc.).
To see this, create one or more additional part documents, as explained earlier.
The document currently being edited shows at the top of the stack. We will refer to this
document as the "current document", the document in which you are working. Its tab is a
different color than the others.
You can change the current document by clicking another document's tab.
When there are too many open documents, some tabs may not be visible. To open the
document, click on the arrow to the right of the tabs, which lets you access the full list of open
documents.
To close the current document, click the "x" at the right of the tabs or click on the document tab
with the middle mouse button. You may also run the "TopSolid > File > Close Document"
26 Missler Software
command. You can also close all documents at once using the "TopSolid > File > Close All
Documents" command.
By placing the mouse cursor on a document tab and pressing the right button, you can access
some contextual commands related to the document.
When you want to work on two documents with them both displayed, you can share the
document area between the two files.
To do this, click on a document tab and hold down the button as you move the mouse to the
edge of the document area. Depending on the chosen edge, you can share horizontally or
vertically.
You can then move a document from one group to the other by dragging and dropping the
document tab.
You can also rearrange the document tabs the same way, but keeping the mouse cursor in the
tab area.
Start Page
TopSolid can also display a special document window (it corresponds with no other
document), called "start page".
This page is viewed when no other document is open, and can also be brought to the
foreground by clicking on its tab, as with a normal document.
It contains all the links enabling rapid access to various useful resources.
You can also open the latest documents and recently used projects, or create new documents
based on frequently used types.
If you have no practical use for this and prefer a gray background, you can still close the page
or uncheck the "Display this page on startup" box so that it does not reappear.
Missler Software 27
Dialogs
Most commands do not work instantaneously, requiring information to be entered before
carrying out an action (by convention, the name of these commands ends with "...").
As soon as such a command is run, a dialog appears, which may be a dialog panel or a dialog
box.
A dialog panel is comprised of a list of input fields that may be distributed into several
sections, identified by a header that describes the contents of the section. Unused sections
may be hidden by clicking their header.
By default, dialog panels display in the area reserved for documents in the top left-hand corner
(they can be moved by "dragging and dropping" them elsewhere), but you can also display
them as an anchored tool window, using the "TopSolid > View > Dialog" command (click to
enable the mode).
Dialog panels are very convenient because they leave the graphics area free during input.
However, when you need to enter a lot of information, they may not be adequate.
A traditional dialog box is then used, such as with the "Tools > Options…" command.
Dialogs (panels or boxes) have buttons to perform some basic actions:
OK
Cancel
28 Missler Software
Help
Pin pushed in
Pin out
Next
Previous
Preview visible
Preview invisible
The "OK" icon validates the dialog once input is complete, then starts to execute the
corresponding action. You can also validate the dialog by "right-clicking > OK" or double
"right-clicking" in the graphical area. You may also press the "Enter" key on your keyboard.
The "Cancel" icon closes the dialog without executing the corresponding action. You can also
close the dialog by "right-clicking > Cancel" in the graphical area or by pressing the "Esc" key
on the keyboard.
The "Help" icon launches the online help to the page describing the use of the command. You
can also launch help by pressing the "F1" key on the keyboard.
The "Pinned" and "Unpinned" icons are used to choose the command's operational mode. If
the pin is pushed in, the command will automatically restart after using it, which allows you to
continue on with, for example, creating several fillets without having to re-launch the
command. However, if the pin is not pushed in, the command will only work once.
The "Next" and "Previous" icons are used in commands that include a chain of dialogs in
order to move to the next one or to return to the previous one.
The "Preview visible" and "Preview invisible" icons are used in commands that may take
time to compute. They are mainly located in the commands of the « Shape » and « Surface »
menus (as for example the draft, deformation and constrained commands).
Inputs
When you are at a dialog, fill in the available fields so that you can validate and execute the
desired action.
Some input fields expect a typed entry, while others expect a graphic.
Regarding the keyboard input fields, just one is active at any given moment. The active field
has a blinking cursor (vertical bar). When you type the value on the keyboard, it appears in the
field.
Missler Software 29
You can change which field is active by clicking on another field with the mouse or by using the
"Tab" key on the keyboard.
You can edit your entry as normal in Windows, using the arrow keys on the keyboard,
selecting characters with the mouse, using the "Backspace" or "Del" key, etc.
Label
Active keyboard field
Special inputs
Previous inputs
Active graphic field
Keyboard prompt
Graphic prompt
A description of the expected value is given by a label generally located above the field, which
may also include a slightly more specific prompt at the start of the status bar. (If you want
even more information for a field, refer to the online help.)
The latest inputs are stored in memory for each field, and you can refer to them using the
dropdown list to the right of the field.
There is also a "+" button to the right of the field, allowing you to carry out special inputs, as
described later in this document.
When you enter a number value, you can specify the unit from among the available units.
When the value contains a decimal value, use the decimal separator that your machine is
configured to use, generally a period.
You can configure your machine to use a comma instead of a period by going to Windows
control panel and editing the regional options. You would then need to customize the number
format and change the "Decimal symbol".
When a graphics input field is active, it is marked with a black rectangle surrounding the
field. Only one graphics input field may be active at a time, but you can have both a keyboard
30 Missler Software
input field and a graphics input field active at the same time. When this happens, the status
bar shows the prompts for each field, separated by a slash ("/").
To input a graphic, use the mouse and make a selection, as specified earlier.
You can also use the field's dropdown list, which offers some common selections. For
example, if you are prompted for a point, TopSolid offers a list of the document's points.
Note that graphics input fields have a colored border, and when you make a selection in one,
its echo is colored the same way. This makes it easier to identify matches when the dialog
has several graphics input fields.
Undo
Everyone makes mistakes!
If it happens to you and you catch your mistake right away, you can easily correct it using the
"Undo" command.
Undo Redo
When you complete a command and TopSolid displays "Ready", you can click on "Undo",
which cancels the changes made by the command. You can undo several commands. The list
of commands that may be undone displays when you click on the arrow to the right of the
"Undo" command icon. This also allows you to undo several commands at once, by clicking
directly in the list.
You might also make the mistake of doing an "Undo" when you don't intend to. If this happens,
you can use the "Redo" command to "undo an undo".
The "Redo" operates similarly to an "Undo", except that the ability to redo is lost once you
begin to make new changes after having done an "Undo".
While a command is in process, undo and redo are generally disabled because the command
has to finish in order to determine which can be undone. Some commands support a local
"undo", which allows some micro-actions to be undone. One example of this is the "Contour..."
command, which lets you draw a profile in a sketch.
View
When designing a 3D product, a large part of your time is spent examining the model under
development in order to think about what needs to be done and then do it.
The screen in front of you quickly feels like an extension of your mind, and you can very easily
and very quickly control its content by moving certain muscles.
TopSolid provides direct mouse access to the features for controlling the contents of a
graphical view:
• Translation: to translate the contents of the view, press the right mouse button and move
it, keeping the button pressed. If the "Alt" key is down, the translation is done in the
direction of the detected element, such as the length of a right edge.
• Rotation: To make the contents of the view turn, press the middle mouse button and
Missler Software 31
move it, keeping the button pressed. If the "Alt" key is down, the rotation is done around the
detected element, such as around a right edge.
• Zoom: to zoom in or out of the contents of the view, turn the mouse wheel one way or the
other.
If your mouse does not have a middle button or a wheel, we strongly recommend changing to
a mouse that does so that your productivity can benefit. You can still carry out these tasks
using commands that work on a mouse with just two buttons.
The commands for controlling the view are grouped together in the "Visualization" menu, with
the most common directly available inside the graphical view and therefore accessible even if
the current working bar is not the Visualization bar.
If some visualization commands inset into the graphic view are in your way, you can remove
them using the "Tools > Customize…" command. They can be added to the "Visualization"
taskbar with the same command, allowing for quick access without having to use the text
menu.
There may be several graphical views in the same document window. You can go directly from
one, two, three, or four views using the special commands by the same name. You can also
create a new view or delete one using the "Split View..." and "Delete View..." commands.
When there are several views, one of them is active and denoted by a black border.
There are several rendering modes available, distributed into three categories:
• Shaded: The shaded modes let you work with a good perception of the space, with the
parts colored like the design colors.
• Realistic: Realistic modes color parts as they would appear in reality, specifically
accounting for the material with which each part will be made. You can also have texturing
effects for heterogeneous materials like wood.
• Wireframe: Wireframe modes display only the edges of the parts, which is useful for
seeing through the material.
32 Missler Software
Visualization Commands
Compass
You have certainly noticed the multicolored object with X, Y, and Z axes, located to the bottom
right of the graphics view. This is the compass, which allows you to better control the
orientation of the view for complex parts.
To orient the view so that an axis is shown on the face, double-click with the left mouse button
on the corresponding arrow.
To make a view make a quarter-turn around one of the axes, double-click with the left mouse
button on the circle arc for that axis.
To make a view turn around one of the axes, click on one of the circle arcs with the left mouse
button and hold the button down while moving the mouse.
To make a view turn around the approximate center of what is shown, click on the point of one
of the arrows with the left mouse button and hold it down as you move the mouse.
To move a view in the direction of one of the axes, click on the stem of one of the arrows with
the left mouse button and hold it down as you move the mouse.
Missler Software 33
If you want to orient a view in relation to an entity, you can anchor the compass to one of its
parts (e.g. a shape's face), and then drag the original sphere of the compass to the entity.
To free up the compass again, drag it to an open area or double-click on the block that replaced
the compass's original sphere.
34 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Options
Options
Missler Software 35
Options TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
TopSolid's installation is configured for the preferred usage habits of most users. To some
extent, you can adapt it to your own preferences.
As described earlier, the ability to manage which tool windows are available is already an
important element.
Then, you can customize the toolbars and define the keyboard shortcuts using the "Tools >
Customize…" command.
It is also possible to set some parameters, or "options".
Some options apply to the entire application, and others are unique to each document.
Application Options
Application options let you control how TopSolid works overall on each workstation.
You can change the application options by using the "Tools > Options…" command.
The options are grouped into categories, such as "Display" for everything having to do with the
display and the graphical interactions.
Most of the colors used by TopSolid can be configured, which enables each user to change
them to suit personal preferences or viewing restrictions. However, each time we make a
reference to a color in this documentation, it will be the default color before any configuration
modification.
You can restore the initial configuration using the "Tools > Manage Settings…" command,
where you can also export and import your settings, which is useful when changing
workstations.
Document Options
Document options apply to each document, making it possible to customize the behavior of
each document individually.
For example, these options let you set the viewing tolerance for more or less faceting in the
document shapes, thereby adjusting the balance between quality and performance in the
rendering
These options are saved inside the document, so they are not lost when it is opened on
another workstation, unlike the application options, which are set per workstation.
They do not, however, affect the document's contents. Setting the view tolerance may differ
according to the document (more fine for small parts than for large parts).
Generally, it is useful to set options for a few documents that can later be used as templates
when creating new documents.
36 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Options
Options Tree
You can access the document options through a special window: the options tree.
To display this tree, make it visible by checking that the "TopSolid > View > Options" command
mode is enabled and then anchor the "Options" tool window to make it visible.
You will then see a tree containing a list of "folders" that can be expanded by clicking on the
"+" sign.
Each folder contains options, which can be edited by selecting them and by "right-clicking >
Edit…" or by double-clicking with the left mouse button.
Missler Software 37
Options TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
38 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Entities
Entities
Missler Software 39
Entities TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
A document contains entities, which represent the result of work performed, and can be
displayed graphically (certain types of entities cannot be displayed, such as parameters, see
below).
Entities Tree
These entities can also be viewed using a specific tool window: the entities tree.
To display this tree, make it visible by checking that the "TopSolid > View > Entities" command
mode is enabled and then anchor the "Entities" tool window to make it visible.
You will then see a tree containing a list of "folders" that can be expanded by clicking on the
"+" sign.
Each folder contains entities that are listed in a particular order (usually the last one created is
on top). If this order isn't convenient, it is possible to move the entities. For this, simply click on
it with the left mouse button and move it while keeping the button pressed down, then release
the button upon reaching the destination.
The text for each entity can display in different colors, depending on the status of the entity:
• Black: Normal.
• Gray: This entity is not available at this time.
• Green: The entity is being edited.
• Blue: The entity must be refreshed (see below).
• Red: The entity is invalid (see below).
40 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Entities
System Entities
Document entities are classified (usually by type) and organized in different corresponding
folders. This is very convenient because it lets you quickly and easily know what a document
contains.
For example, you can expand the "Planes" folder and see that it contains three planes called
"Absolute XY Plane", "Absolute XZ Plane" and "Absolute YZ Plane".
These are the plane entities of the document.
A document therefore contains certain predefined entities to begin with, called "system
entities", which may be invisible.
Visibility
You can click on the absolute XY plane with the left mouse button to select it, then "right-
click > Show" to make it visible (zoom to fit to see it better).
An entity, even a system entity, can be set as "visible or invisible" from the "Show" or "Hide"
command in the context menu by previously selecting the entity in either the graphical area
(only to hide if already visible) or in the entities tree (selection from the tree).
From the Entity tree (or Part tree) this action can also be done by checking or unchecking the
checkbox button located before the entity name.
However, a visible entity may not always be displayed for various reasons, such as when it is
on an invisible layer (see below).
Name
The text identifying an entity in the tree is called the "entity name", which can be changed,
with the exception of a system entity, and therefore renamed.
When you select and "right-click" on the entity, the entity commands are listed in the context
menu under the entity's name, such as "Shape 1" if the shape of the base is selected.
You can, for example, go in the shapes folder containing "Shape 1" for the base you previously
made, and change its name either by double-clicking with the left mouse button on the "Shape
1" text (or clicking once and pressing the "F2" key) and editing the name directly, or by
selecting the shape (in the tree or the graphical area) and "right-clicking > Shape 1 Others >
Rename…".
Missler Software 41
Entities TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Information
You can also associate other information with an entity by using the "Entity - Others >
Information..." command in the context menu:
• Description: The description is text that is generally longer than the name, which can be
more precise. For example, a parameter named "d" may have "Main Diameter" as the
description. The description, if it exists, will be displayed between parentheses after the
name in the tree.
• Comment: The comment is text that can be several lines long, and can give a more
detailed explanation about the entity. This text is displayed when the mouse cursor hovers
over the entity in the tree.
Deleting
You can also delete an entity, with the exception of a system entity, using the "Delete"
command from the popup menu.
Another way is to select the entity and press the "Del" key.
42 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Operations
Operations
Missler Software 43
Operations TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
A document contains operations, which represent the sequence of actions that led to the
result shown by the document entities.
For example, to create a block shape, a block creation command had to be run to produce an
operation that generated the right shape based on values defining the size of the block.
The role of the operations is primarily to remember the design process and to be able to redo
it by modifying certain values.
To better explain this concept, we can create other operations, such as to round the edges of
the block using the "Shape > Fillet…" command. Simply run the command, select an edge for
the block, and click OK. You can then round one edge with a given radius and an adjacent
edge with a different radius.
Operations Tree
You can find out what operations are in a document by using a special tool window:
the operations tree.
To display this tree, make it visible by checking that the "TopSolid > View > Operations"
command mode is enabled and then anchor the "Operations" tool window to make it visible.
We can then see a tree containing a list of operations, arranged chronologically from bottom
(first operation executed) to top (last operation executed).
For example, the block creation operation is executed first, which generates "Shape 1", and
then the "Fillet 1" operation is executed, which performed the first rounding. Finally, "Fillet 2" is
executed to get to the final shape.
The text for each operation may display in different colors, based on the status of the
operation:
• Black: Normal.
• Gray: The operation has not been executed.
• Green: The operation is currently being edited.
• Blue: The operation is in manual refresh mode and needs to be refreshed (see below).
44 Missler Software
• Orange: The operation is not up-to-date. It has been modified, but it has not been re-
executed (in manual refresh mode, see below).
• Red: The operation is invalid (see below).
Commands
To modify operations, select them in the tree and use the contextual commands that are
available to you.
This, however, requires that you have the operation tree displayed on-screen, which may
sometimes be cumbersome, and finding the operation in the tree can be tedious.
A more convenient method is to select a portion of the entity, such as the face of a shape, and
right-click on it. TopSolid will look for the operation that produced the face and present its
contextual commands in a menu section labeled with the name of the operation.
As with entities, it is possible to rename or delete an operation and then assign it a
description or comment using the "Others > Information..." command.
Deactivation
It is also possible to deactivate operations.
To disable an operation, simply select it, and "right-click > Deactivate".
When an operation is deactivated, it is not deleted. However, it is not executed, and everything
works as if it didn't exist. For example, if a fillet is deactivated, the resulting shape will look as
if it has no special fillet.
You can also see that the deactivated operation is grayed in the operation tree, which means
that it has not been executed.
To reactivate a deactivated operation, simply select it, and "right-click > Activate".
Not all operations can be deactivated. When this is not possible, the "Deactivate" command
will not be available in the popup menu when this operation is selected.
When deactivating a composite operation (see further), none of its sub-operations is executed.
Deactivated operation
Missler Software 45
Condition
It is also possible to make the execution of an opertion conditional by using the "Condition..."
contextual command. This is mainly used to create families of parts in which some do not
necessarily use all of the operations. See the online help for more information.
When a condition is associated to a composite operation (see further), it does not
automatically applies to its sub-operations, it must be done explicitely if they also need to be
conditional.
Basification
System entities, such as absolute planes, do not have operations associated with them
because they are not variable and do not need to be updated.
An entity without an associated operation is called a basic entity.
Some non-basic entities can be made basic by deleting the associated operation, which is
called "basifying" the entity.
When possible, this is done by selecting the entity and using the "Basify" contextual
command.
This can be useful, for example, when one has created a parameter entity whose value
depends on the radius of a circle, and one wants to break this dependence and made it a non-
associative parameter.
Conversely, if an entity is basified, you may later regret it and want to make it "intelligent"
again.
To do this, create an entity with the desired associativity, then select the basic entity and use
its "Unbasify" popup command, which lets the system know to use the created associative
entity on that occasion.
Replacement
An associative entity is created by an operation capable of handling a certain type of
calculation.
For example, a point can be created by an operation that calculates the middle point between
two existing points.
In certain cases, you may change your mind and want to modify how the entity is calculated.
This is done by replacing the operation by a more appropriate type of operation.
To do this, select the operation and choose a new type of operation to create from its
"Replace" popup menu.
Some operations cannot be replaced, in which case the "Replace" popup menu does not
appear.
Insertion
As seen in the example with fillets, the order of operations is important, and it is sometimes
necessary to place an operation at a particular position in the order.
When you want to add a new operation between two existing operations, you have to move
the insertion cursor in the operations tree, which is marked with a red arrow. To do this, click
and hold down the left mouse button as you move the operation, and then release the button
once it is where you would like it to appear.
An icon appears in the document tab to show that it is in insertion mode.
To change out of this mode, move the insertion cursor to the top of the operations tree, or you
can select the insertion cursor by "right-clicking > End Inserting". You may also turn off
insertion mode by clicking the insertion icon in the document tab.
46 Missler Software
While in insertion mode, new operations are created at the cursor's location.
End Inserting
Insertion cursor
Move
After creating an operation, you may find that it is not in the right location. It is then possible to
move it.
For this, simply click on it with the left mouse button and move it while keeping the button
pressed down, then release the button upon reaching the destination.
When moving an operation, do not try to put it before another operation whose result is
necessary to properly execute the operation being moved. For example, it doesn't make sense
to move the fillet operation to a position before the block creation operation.
Folders
When making a lot of operations, the list can be very long and hard to manage in the operation
tree. It is helpful then to arrange the operations in operations folders.
To create an operation folder, select the insertion cursor, "right-click > Folder". You can then
expand it by clicking the "+" sign, and then you can move the desired operations into the folder
by placing them over the green arrow corresponding to a starting operation for the sequence
of operations of the folder.
The folder is an operation like any other, and can be renamed, moved, deleted, etc. However,
because it contains other operations, it is considered as a composite operation.
Missler Software 47
Folder
Start operation
It is not the only operation like this, as you can expand a fillet operation, for example, and find
that it also contains a "green arrow".
Editing
When you want to change an operation, such as a fillet, it is easier to edit it using the "Edit"
popup command, which brings you to the same place as for creating the operation (same
screen and same position in the chronology). You just have to enter the new operation
definition.
For more minor changes, the easiest method is to double-click on a part of the operation entity
(ex. the face of the fillet), which brings up the dimension management piece where you can
change the value. Double-click it again to make the dimensions disappear.
Some operations also display key values in the tree (for example in the case of a block, the
three lengths are displayed), in a sub-node called "Definition". These values can then be
changed by double-clicking on the corresponding node.
Stages
Document operations are broken down into groups of operations that are executed
sequentially. These are called "stages".
The stages themselves are arranged chronologically and executed sequentially.
The list of stages in the document is available through a command located in the application
window menu bar, to the right of "Undo/Redo".
The command icon corresponds to the current stage, and can be changed by selecting
another stage in the list that appears when it is clicked (the stage at the bottom of the list is
executed first, and the stage at the top of the list is executed last).
The current stage's name is also shown at the insertion cursor location in the operation tree.
48 Missler Software
Current stage Current stage change

Available stages
Some commands work only in a specific stage. When you launch this type of command, the
current stage automatically changes.
Now that we know what a stage is, you may wonder what purpose it serves.
Stages play several essential roles:
• Error avoidance: For example, the calculation of a part's mass is done in the analysis
stage, which is executed after the modeling stage. This guarantees that the measurement
is always taken on the final part, even after adding a fillet, which is always done in the
modeling stage.
• Performance improvement: When a stage is current, the following stages are not
executed. This makes it possible, for example, to string together several modifications to a
complex part in the modeling stage without triggering the mass calculation with each
modification.
• Ease of use: Tolerancing on a 3D part is possible in the annotation stage. When the part is
modified in the modeling stage, the annotations generated in a later stage are not yet there,
which makes the display cleaner.
Missler Software 49
Invalid
Let's consider again the example of the block and its two fillets. Add a third fillet, double-click
on the second fillet and then on the dimension that appears and enter the value "1000".
Several things happen:
• An error message appears, indicating that "Fillet 2" is invalid because its radius is too big.
Click OK on the message to continue.
• A round red icon with a white exclamation point displays in the document tab.
• TopSolid displays the shape as it was before creating the invalid fillet.
• If you display the operation tree, you will see that the "Fillet 2" operation appears in red and
that the operations after it are grayed because they have not been executed.
• Some elements appear in red in the graphics area indicating the cause of the invalidity.
This is an invalid document, as you may encounter from time to time!
Invalid document
Invalid operation
Cause of invalidity
It is important to know how to get out of this kind of situation.

The first thing to do is often to display the operation tree to see which one is the invalid
operation so that you can edit, repair, or even delete it, if necessary.
Another way to edit the invalid operation is to click on the invalidity icon on the document tab.
50 Missler Software
When editing an operation, some input fields may be invalid. They correspond to selections
that are no longer applicable.
For example, if the edge used to make a fillet no longer exists after modifications to the base
shape, the corresponding selection field will be marked invalid when you edit the fillet
operation.
You will then need to select another edge or delete the fillet if you no longer need it.
Update
When making a modification, such as a change to a dimension value for a fillet radius,
TopSolid automatically updates the model once the modification is submitted.
This may sometimes be undesirable, especially when you want to make several modifications
and the update takes a long time (as with a complex model).
It is then possible to turn off automatic updating by disabling it with the "TopSolid > Edit >
Auto-update" command.
In manual update mode, you have to specifically tell TopSolid to update the model by using
the "TopSolid > Edit > Update" command.
In order to not "forget" that automatic updating is disabled, the manual update command is
located temporarily in the graphical area, at the top right-hand corner of the view.
Update
When making modifications to a model, invalidity situations may arise, such as the
disappearance of an edge being used for a fillet.
TopSolid can automatically correct some errors. For example, it can automatically remove a
deleted edge from the list of edges used for a fillet.
Missler Software 51
This saves time, but it can also be dangerous when you are in the process of making minor
changes to a nearly finalized model where nothing significant should disappear.
It is then better to repair all of the errors manually and to not have any applications running
that would make automatic corrections.
This is possible by disabling the Update Heals mode through the "TopSolid > Edit > Update
Heals" command.
As seen above, the update stops the current stage, which can save time. However, it may
sometimes be useful to do a full update, for example, to get the exact mass of the part you
want to modify, without changing the stage. This is done with the "TopSolid > Edit > Update
All" command.
Rebuilding
Usually, an operation can automatically detect when it needs to be re-executed, which is
exactly what will happen during the next update.
However, in some cases it may be necessary to force it to execute the operation, which is
done using the "Rebuild" contextual command.
It is also possible to trigger all of the document's operations to execute using the "TopSolid >
Edit > Rebuild" command.
Refreshing
Some operations may take a long time to refresh, such as kinematic or dynamic simulations.
To simulate a complex mechanism for a long enough time, this can take several minutes or
even a half hour.
If TopSolid refreshed this operation every time the assembly changed, it would be very hard to
work.
To make this easier, such operations have a manual or auto refresh mode. To change mode,
simple select the operation, "right-click > Auto Refresh".
When an operation is in manual refresh mode and it needs to be refreshed, the "Refresh"
contextual command becomes available, making it possible to do the refresh.
When a document contains operations that need to be refreshed manually, the "TopSolid >
Edit > Refresh" command becomes accessible, which is used for refreshing all of the
operations in the document that need to be updated. This command is also available in the
application's small toolbar.
Synchronization
When several documents are updated (ex. for an assembly with multiple levels of
subassemblies after the modification of a part, see below), they are generally processed one
by one, in the order of dependencies, and all of their operations are executed sequentially,
step by step.
This method, however, does not includes some perhaps essential functionalities, such as the
ability to modify a part of an assembly based on its association with other parts in the
assembly.
This brings us to the concept of synchronized documents, addressed here and used later,
especially for creating an in place or for using processes.
A group of synchronized documents forms a synchronization group, with one document
being the parent, and the others the children.
In the parent document, a "Synchronized" folder appears in the entities tree, containing the
list of children documents with which it is synchronized.
52 Missler Software
In a child document, the "Synchronized" folder also appears in the entities tree, but contains
only the name of the parent document in bold.
When several documents are synchronized, they are updated simultaneously, not
sequentially.
In other words, a document operation can be executed, then another from another document,
and then another from the first document.
These changes back and forth are shown in the operation tree when the mode "Show
Synchronizations" is on, which indicates where operations from another document will be
executed.
Show synchronizations
Operations executed in
the document "Part 5"
after "Positioning 1"
and before "Inclusion 2"
Synchronized documents are highly dependent on one another, which is why the PDM
processes them as a group.
In particular, when a document is checked-in, all of its synchronized documents are also
checked in.
Similarly, when one is modified, all are modified.
Generation
Some operations generate other operations, like for instance an assembly drilling operation
that generates drilling operations in each drilled part document.
Generated operations are identified in bold in the operations tree, they cannot be modified
directly.
Tolerances
Some operations are not able to produce an exact result, and in that case an approximation is
made.
For instance, when uniting two cylindrical shapes, the intersection curve between the
cylindrical faces is an approximation and does not exactly coincide with the faces.
The fineness of the approximation can be managed using the modeling options.
Missler Software 53
By editing these options in the options tree, you can manage the modeling tolerance, which is
defined using two values:
• Linear tolerance, which sets the maximum acceptable error in distance between a point of
approximation and the exact corresponding point on the object.
• Angular tolerance sets the maximum acceptable error in orientation between normal in a
point of approximation and in the exact corresponding point on the object.
The finer the tolerance, the better the modeling quality, but the larger the memory
consumption and the worse the overall performance.
You should therefore use the coarsest tolerance possible that is compatible with the modeling
quality requirements (for instance, if a part will be manufactured with a tolerance of one tenth
of millimeter, there is no point modeling it with a linear tolerance of less than one hundredth of
millimeter).
The options modeling tolerance only applies to the operations that will be newly created, it is
possible to modify the modeling tolerance of existing operations by using their "Tolerance..."
contextual command (this command is not available on operations that always produce an
exact result, or of which approximation quality is not adjustable).
54 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Visualization
Visualization
Missler Software 55
Visualization TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
In a previous chapter, we covered various ways to control the visualization of objects being
designed. Specifically, we saw how to have one or more graphical views, how to orient them,
zoom, and select a rendering type.
There are other means available to you to go even further, as described below.
Tolerances
Some entities should be handled using polygons or polyhedrons in order to be viewed.
The fineness of the approximation can be managed using the visualization options.
By editing these options in the options tree, you can manage the viewing tolerance, which is
defined using two values:
• Linear tolerance, which sets the maximum acceptable error in distance between a point of
approximation and the exact corresponding point on the object.
• Angular tolerance sets the maximum acceptable error in orientation between normal in a
point of approximation and in the exact corresponding point on the object.
The finer the tolerance, the better the visual quality, but the larger the memory consumption
and the worse the overall performance of the display.
You should therefore use the coarsest tolerance possible that is compatible with reasonable
visual comfort requirements.
Attributes
An entity's visualization can be controlled individually using attributes.
An attribute can be associated to an entity to alter its visual aspect without modifying its
definition.
Depending on the entity type, there are various attributes available. You can edit them by right-
clicking on the entity and selecting "> Attributes…". When this command is run, a dialog shows
all of the attributes relevant to the entity and allows you to modify them.
The main attributes are the color, transparency, and layers, which are described below.
56 Missler Software
Colors
The color attribute allows a color (chosen from a predefined palette or customized) to be
associated with an entity.
More specifically, it is a design color, that will be used in non-realistic rendering modes in
order to distinguish entities with specific functionalities.
In realistic renderings, parts are shown in their true color, which depends on the material with
which they are made or even on their coating, if they have one (see later).
Transparency
Shape entities support the transparency entity, which allows you to see through to what is
behind the surface.
It may be useful to make some parts in the assembly transparent in order to see the inside of a
machine.
Like the color, this is also a design transparency, that will be used only in non-realistic
rendering modes.
Layers
You can define layers in a part or assembly using the "Visualization > Layer…" command.
A layer is defined by an integer (its ID) and a name. The name can then be changed, but the
ID cannot be modified once the layer is created.
Layers are stored in the "Layers" folder in the entity tree. It is also possible to create new
layers by right-clicking the folder and selecting "> Layer…".
You can make a layer visible or invisible using the "Show" and "Hide" popup commands that
are available when you select a layer.
Then, you can associate an entity to a layer using the entity's "Attributes..." popup command,
which allows you to modify its layer attribute.
When an entity is associated with a layer, it is not displayed when the layer is invisible.
Note that, when an entity's layer is visible, the entity cannot be displayed if it is invisible itself.
Default Attributes
The attributes (color, linetype, transparency and layer) can be set before creating the elements
(default attributes) thanks to the graphic palette icon of the icon bar located on the right side of
the screen or the button located at the bottom of the screen.
Default attributes setting
Missler Software 57
The dialog of this command also allows to define a random color for the shapes creation (see
online help for more details).
Forced Wireframe Render Modes

It is possible to make a shape entity display as a wireframe model, even if the render mode of
the view in which it is displayed is shaded.
This is done using the wireframe render mode attribute.
Cameras
The orientation of a graphical view can be saved by defining a camera. This can be done
using the "Visualization > Cameras > Camera From View…" command.
Cameras are entities stored in the "Cameras" folder in the entities tree.
Then, when you want to orient a view according to a camera, simply open the cameras folder,
click on a camera with the left mouse button, and while keeping the button held down, move to
the view and release the button. You can also double-click on a camera, which makes it the
active view.
Note that, when a camera is applied to a view, this also causes a global zoom, which is
generally very useful.
From the start, the cameras folder already contains several predefined system cameras that
correspond to the traditional orientations, particularly:
• Top Camera: view from Z+ with horizontal X+ to the right and vertical Y+ to the top.
• Front Camera: view from Y- with horizontal X+ to the right and vertical Y+ to the top.
• Perspective Camera: view in perspective with X+ to the right, Y+ to the left, and vertical
Z+ to the top.
These system cameras are important because they can be applied directly to views using the
"Visualization > Top/Front/Perspective camera" commands, which are always available as
quick access commands in the graphics area.
System cameras can be redefined in order to have a "correct" front view of the modeling in
progress. This is done by selecting one of the system cameras and using the "Define From
View..." contextual command. The other system cameras are also redefined in order to
maintain their same relative orientations.
It is also possible to define cameras that produce conical perspective effects, essentially to
produce realistic images.
Cuts
When creating a complex part or assembly, it may be necessary to see what is happening
inside it. To do this, you can create a cut using the "Visualization > Cut…" command.
Cuts are entities stored in the "Cuts" folder in the entity tree.
Then, when you want to enable a cut, just double-click it. Just one cut can be active at a time.
To no longer have an active cut, simply "right-click > Deactivate Cut" in the graphical area.
Filters
When working on a complex model, you can temporarily make some entities invisible in order
to clear up the view.
You may be working in different areas, however, and so you may need to change the visibility
of the corresponding entities.
To avoid this, you can save each state by defining filters.
58 Missler Software
There are several types of filters that may be created using the "Visualization > Filters" menu.
The simplest is the "Entities Filter" command, which only allows some entities to display or for
all but some to display (when the "Exclude" box is checked).
Filters are entities stored in the "Filters" folder in the entity tree.
When you want to apply a filter to a view, open the filters folder, click on one with the left
mouse button, and while holding down the button, move it to the view and release the button.
To remove the filter from the view, right-click and select ">Clear a Filter>" in the view.
To make sure you do not "forget" that a view is filtered, the command to deactivate all filters is
temporarily located in the graphical area, at the top right-hand corner of the view.
Deactivate All Filters
Visualizations
You can save all of the parameters for a graphical view by defining a visualization. This can
be done using the "Visualization > Visualizations > Visualizations From a View…" command.
Visualizations are entities stored in the "Visualizations" folder in the entity tree.
Then, when you want to modify a view so that it is identical to the saved view, just open the
visualizations folder, click one with the left mouse button, and while holding the button down,
move it to the view and release the button.
Missler Software 59
60 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Tools
Tools
Missler Software 61
Tools TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
When modeling parts or assemblies, it is often necessary to create intermediary constructions
based on simple geometries (points, axes, planes, etc.) from which to build.
Additionally, if you want to study several solutions or make families of parts, it is very
convenient to make the final modeling depend on a number of key parameters.
All of this is possible via the "Tools" menu commands.
Parameters
A parameter is a non-geometric entity that is not displayed in the graphical area.
A parameter is therefore accessible only by the entity tree, in the "Parameters" folder.
There are several types of parameters, each created by a special command in the "Tools >
Parameters" menu.
Another way to access these commands is to "right-click" on the parameters folder in the entity
tree.
Real Parameters
The most common is a real parameter, which represents a real numeric value with units (i.e.
able to have a decimal value, as opposed to an integer value), created using the "Tools >
Parameters > Real parameter…" command.
This command allows you to create either basic parameters that represent fixed values or
simple associative parameters, such as the diameter of a shape's circular edge.
When you set parameters for modeling, you generally start by creating basic parameters,
which is done by using the command, selecting the general type (length, angle, etc.), entering
the parameter's name, and then inputting the value with the right units.
Which units are available depends on the selected type. If you don't give any, TopSolid
assumes the current unit for the type, as defined in the document options (in "Options >
General > Units"). Once you validate your input by "tabbing" out of the field, it displays in the
field.
You can also enter a formula using predefined parameters, such as "a + b + 10mm". The
various operators you can use in formulas are described in detail in the online help.
You can also select a shape's edge or face for its length (right edge) or its diameter (circular
edge or cylindrical or spherical face).
You can also create associative parameters calculated in different ways. For example, the
"Tools > Parameters > Parameter angle…" allows you to make a parameter whose value will
be the angle measured between two directions taken on existing entities (e.g. the angle
between the axes of two drillings). If the entities are modified, the parameter will be
recalculated using an operation that can be seen in the chronology of the operations tree.
Entering Real Values

The different ways for giving the value when defining a real parameter apply each time that
TopSolid prompts for you to enter a real value.
For example, when you create a block as we did earlier and you put the cursor on the "X
Length:" field, you see the prompt "Enter the X length.", and you can enter "10mm" (fixed
value) or "d+10mm" (formula, supposing that a parameter "d" already exists).
When only the result of the formula computation is of interest, but the formula itself is not to be
kept, it should be preceded by the character "#": "#d+10mm".
You can also access other special input methods by pressing the "+" button to the right of the
input field.
62 Missler Software
If you then select "Measured Value", you can click on a circular edge to measure its diameter,
and its value will be copied into the field.
If you select "Associative Value" instead, it maintains a link to the selected edge, and if it
changes during an update, the value will automatically be recalculated, which may have an
effect of modifying the size of the block.
You can also create parameters on the fly without leaving the current command. This is done
using the commands available in the " Creation " section.
Finally, you can also create a basic parameter and use it to populate the input field all at once
by typing name=value (ex. d=10mm) in the input field.
Relay Parameters
A formula can only contain parameters defined in the document's parameter folder. If you
would like to use parameters defined elsewhere, a relay parameter must be used.
A relay parameter is defined locally (and can therefore be used in a formula), but its value is
always the same than the parameter that it relays.
There are several types of relays available:
• Internal: allows you to access a component's internal parameter. For example, if you want
to get the nominal diameter parameter for a screw that was included in an assembly, you
Missler Software 63
can use this method, select the screw, and choose the right parameter.
• External: allows you to use the value of a parameter in another document.
• Project: allows you to use the value of a project parameter.
When you want to create a formula with a relay parameter, use one of the relay parameters
available in the special entries. The formula will be created locally if it does not already exist,
and its name will be concatenated to the formula being entered in the edit field.
Tolerancing Real Values

When entering a real value, you can assign it a tolerance by using the commands in the
"Tolerance" menu.
You can either choose a standard tolerance or manually enter a specific tolerance.
The tolerance will then be displayed between brackets in the input field after the value, without
displaying the units, which are the same by convention as the toleranced value.
The value used, called the effective value, is by default the nominal value. However, you
can select another value from the "Tolerance" menu drop-down list, which will then be marked
with a special character after the first bracket:
• < : Minimum Value = Nominal Value + Low Tolerance.
• > : Maximum Value = Nominal Value + High Tolerance.
• # : Mean Value = Nominal Value + (Low Tolerance + High Tolerance) / 2.
64 Missler Software
When the value is used to drive a dimension, it will be displayed with the tolerance, and if the
effective value is not the nominal value, it will also be displayed underneath the nominal value
with the character in parentheses indicating what type of value it is.
Integer Parameters
To represent an integer value without a unit, use an integer parameter, which is created by
the "Tools > Parameters > Integer parameter…" command.
This allows you to set up repetition patterns, for example.
You can also input formulas to give the value of such a parameter. The result of the formula
may be a real number, in which case it is converted into an integer by removing the decimal
portion.
Entering Integer Values

As with real parameters, the various ways for defining the value of an integer parameter are
applicable each time that TopSolid prompts you to enter an integer value.
However, there are much fewer ways to enter an integer than there are for entering a real
number parameter.
Other Parameters
There are other, less commonly used parameters that are described in detail in the online
help.
Generally, each type of parameter has a certain type of input, based on the same principle as
for the previously described parameters.
User properties
A document can have properties, as explained in the "PDM" chapter.
Several standard properties are available ("Description", "Reference", etc.), but it is also
possible to add new properties by defining user properties.
Missler Software 65
To do this, you need to create a special "Properties" document, located in the "Special" tab of
the document creation command.
Here, you need to create the desired type of parameter, and then fill in the different fields:
• Domain: Name allowing you to classify the property (properties with the same domain will
be grouped in separate lists when required to select them).
• Description: Property description.
• Parameter: Parameter created defining the type of property and its value by default.
Once this document is created, you can create the this type of property in a document using
the "Tools > Parameters > User property..." command.
Points
A point is a simple geometric entity that can be useful in some modelings.
For example, you can create points and build from it. If you modify the points later, the entire
model will be updated. This may allow you to explore various solutions or even to make
families of parts (see later).
There are several commands available in the "Tools > Points" menu that allow you to carry out
various types of point creation operations. See the online help for a detailed description of
them all.
Created point entities are stored in the "Points" folder in the entity tree.
Initially, this folder contains the "Absolute Origin Point" system entity, which cannot be
deleted or modified.
66 Missler Software
Entering Points
Modeling commands frequently prompt you to enter points. For example, to create a sphere
("Shape > Primitives > Sphere..." command), you have to give the center point.
Advanced input and

on the fly creations
Existing points and frames
There are several possible ways to enter this:

• Scroll through the list and select an existing point (or a frame, whose origin will be used).
• Graphically select an existing point.
• Graphically select a part of an entity that can define a point, such as the vertex of a shape,
a circular edge (using the center of the circle), a spherical face (using the center of the
sphere), etc.
• Press the "+" button to access special input or to create an entity on the fly (using the
creation commands without having to leave the current dialog).
In all cases, an associative link is established between the entity providing the point and the
created operation that uses it.
When the point is entered, the software highlights the selected entity (or entity portion) and the
defined point to be used.
For example, when you select a circular edge to input its center, the edge appears in dotted
lines to show that it is selected, and its center point is also displayed to show that it has been
identified.
Missler Software 67
Entered points
Selected edge
Axes
Like points, axes are also geometric entities used to carry out constructions.
Axes are visible as a mixed dotted line, whose limits can be changed if they are basic, using
the "Extent..." contextual command.
There are several commands available in the "Tools > Axes" menu for various types of axis
creation operations. See the online help for a detailed description of them all.
Created axis entities are stored in the "Axes" folder in the entity tree.
Initially, this folder contains the X, Y, and Z absolute axes, which cannot be deleted or
modified.
Entering Axes
The modeling commands frequently prompt you to enter axes. For example, you may have to
enter this to define the axis for a revolved shape.
To input it, like points, there are several available possibilities:
• Scroll through the list and select an existing axis.
• Graphically select an existing axis.
• Graphically select a part of an entity that can define an axis, such as a linear edge, a
cylindrical face (using the axis of the cylinder), etc.
• Press the "+" button to access special input or to create an entity on the fly (using the
creation commands without having to leave the current dialog).
In all cases, an associative link is established between the entity providing the axis and the
created operation that uses it.
68 Missler Software
Orientation
Advanced input and
on the fly creations
Entered axis
Inversion Existing axes Selected face
When the axis is entered, the software highlights the selected entity (or entity portion) and the
defined axis to be used.
When TopSolid prompts for an axis, its orientation may be important, such as if it is used to
define the axis of a rotation to define the direction of the positive angles.
If this is the case, an arrow is displayed to show the positive direction, and there is a button to
the left of the input field for reversing it. (It is also possible to reverse the direction by double-
clicking the arrow in the graphical area.)
Entering Directions
Modeling commands frequently prompt you to enter directions. For example, you may have
to enter this to define an offset point in a given direction from a point of reference.
A direction contains less information than an axis, which is defined by a direction and a
passing point. (The direction is not linked to a passing point. It corresponds to the
mathematical notion of a unitary vector.)
The consequence of this is that an axis can be defined so as to also define a direction (ex. a
cylindrical face defined as a direction from its axis), but the contrary is not so (a plane can
define its direction, but not its axis).
Input is done similarly to inputting axes, so it will not be repeated here.
Missler Software 69
Planes
Like axes, planes are also geometric entities used to carry out constructions.
There are several commands available in the "Tools > Planes" menu that allow you to carry
out various types of plane creation operations. See the online help for a detailed description of
them all.
Planes may be viewed using their limits, which may be modified, if they are basic, using the
"Extent..." contextual command.
Plane
Limits
Created plane entities are stored in the "Planes" folder in the entity tree.
Initially, this folder contains the XY, XZ, and YZ absolute planes, which cannot be deleted or
modified.
Entering Planes
Modeling commands frequently prompt you to enter planes. For example, you may be
prompted for this when positioning a planar sketch.
Input is done similarly to inputting axes, so it will not be repeated here.
Frames
Like planes, frames are also geometric entities used to carry out constructions.
A frame defines a full coordinate system, and these integral elements are then accessible
during a selection.
For example, when you want to enter a plane, you can get one of the three main planes for a
frame by clicking on the small rectangle in the frame.
There are several commands available in the "Tools > Frames" menu that allow you to carry
out various types of frame creation operations. See the online help for a detailed description of
them all.
70 Missler Software
Z Axis
XZ Plane
X Axis
Y Axis
Origin Point
Created plane entities are stored in the "Frames" folder in the entity tree.
Initially, this folder contains the "Absolute Frame" system entity, which cannot be deleted or
modified.
Entering Frames
Modeling commands sometimes prompt you to enter frames. For example, you may be
prompted for this to position a drilling point.
Input is done similarly to inputting planes, so it will not be repeated here.
Transforms
Transforms are entities which, like parameters, have no graphical representation, and are
therefore only accessible via the entity tree in the "Transforms" folder, which appears as soon
as there is at least one transform created in the document.
Different types of transforms can be created using commands in the "Tools > Transforms"
menu.
Certain types of transforms represent movements that do not change the shape of the
geometries to which they are applied (translation, rotation, etc.), while others may change the
shape (scaling, deformation, etc.).
Transforms are used in certain operations, such as transforming a shape (see later).
Missler Software 71
Patterns
Patterns represent a group of transforms, which may be applied to an original object to
produce copies.
Patterns are specifically used to define repetitions (see later).
Different types of patterns can be created using commands available in the "Tools > Patterns"
menu.
To make them easier to use, you can specify a starting point or frame and have them
represented graphically.
A cross is displayed at the starting point, and a point at each place where a pattern transform
has been made.
Starting point
Sets
You can define sets in a part or assembly using the "Tools > Sets > Set…" command.
Sets are stored in the "Sets" folder in the entity tree. You can also create new sets by right-
clicking the folder and selecting "> Set…".
This allows you to group several entities together so that you can perform certain actions on all
of them at the same time.
For example, you can "show" all entities in a set by selecting the set and using the "Show"
popup command instead of selecting and showing each entity.
The set contains shortcuts to the entities that make up the set. When a shortcut is deleted,
the entity at the end is not deleted; only the contents of the set is modified.
The same entity can belong to more than one set.
You can also define a set within an existing set (thus, a subset) by selecting and using the
"Set..." popup command as in the folder example, which is the first level of the hierarchy.
72 Missler Software
One of the sets may be current, in which case newly created entries will automatically be
added to this set.
When working on a complex model requiring a large number of construction entities to be
created, it is useful to organize them in different sets and only show the ones you need at a
particular time.
Missler Software 73
74 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Sketches
Sketches
Missler Software 75
Sketches TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
Creating sketches is a required passing point for modeling most non-trivial parts.
There are two types of sketches available:
• A planar sketch (or "2D sketch") is always contained in a plane.
• A spatial sketch (or "3D sketch") may or may not be included. This type of sketch will be
covered in the next chapter.
The remainder of this chapter focuses on manipulating planar sketches, which will be
abbreviated to "sketch".
Creation
There are several ways to create a sketch, the simplest being to "right-click" on a plane and
select "Sketch...".
You can also use the "2D Sketch > Sketch..." menu command.
Yet another way is to run the geometry creation command in the "2D Sketch" menu (e.g.
"Line...", "Circle...", etc.), which automatically creates a new sketch.
If this is the document's first sketch, the sketch's plane is automatically chosen as being the
absolute XY plane. Otherwise, TopSolid prompts for you to select a plane.
The document's sketches are stored in the "Sketches" folder in the entity tree. This folder
appears as soon as there is at least one sketch in the document. You will see it show up when
you create the first sketch.
As soon as the sketch has been created, it is set to "editing" so that you can work in it.
Once the sketch is finished, click the "editing complete" button at the top of the screen to end
the sketch editing session and return to normal mode.
If you stop editing the sketch without having created a minimum geometry (dot, line, etc.), the
sketch is automatically deleted in order to avoid having empty sketches by mistake.
Frame
The geometry contained in the sketch is represented using a frame that is specific to each
sketch.
The sketch frame is shown as two arrows adjoined by a small rectangle while in edit mode.
The longer arrow represents the X axis, and the other represents the Y axis. The origin is
located at the intersection of these two axes.
The full positioning of the sketch is defined by three elements:
• The sketch support plane.
• A reference point defining the sketch frame origin by projecting onto the plane.
• A reference direction that, once projected on the sketch plane (it therefore must not be
orthogonal), defines the X or Y direction of the sketch frame.
When you have created a sketch on a given plane, it becomes the sketch support plane, and
the other positioning elements are automatically chosen. By default, the reference point
defining the sketch origin is the document's absolute origin point, and the reference direction is
chosen so as to have the sketch's Y direction be the document's absolute X axis (sketch
vertical as document vertical) or even the document's Y axis, if the sketch plane is orthogonal
to the Z axis.
76 Missler Software
Y Axis Editing complete
Frame
X Axis
You can redefine this positioning using the "2D Sketch > Position Sketch..." command. When
a sketch's position changes, it keeps its position relative to the frame, unless there are
constraints related to the sketch's environment (see later).
Coordinates
Thanks to the sketch frame, you can use coordinates to define the geometry in the sketch.
For example, when you create a point in the sketch with the "2D Sketch > Point..." command,
you can enter X=10mm and Y=20mm in the dialog box.
Note that these coordinates are expressed in terms of the sketch frame, not as the document's
absolute frame.
Grid
Of course, the command for creating a point allows the point to be defined without having to
enter its coordinates. This is done simply by clicking on the desired location.
When using this method, it is difficult to accurately determine the coordinates of the created
point. To make this easier, TopSolid developed an input grid.
By default, this grid displays in the form of small points (the size of a pixel), but there are other
possible representations available through the "2D Sketch > Modify grid..." command.
This grid serves as a visual aid, but it is also used to define another grid, called a magnetic
grid, which is superimposed on it and may be finer. (The number of subdivisions is two by
default. That is, there are two points on the magnetic grid per point on the input grid, but this
can be modified using the "2D Sketch > Modify grid..." command.)
In "2D Sketch > Modes > Magnetic grid" mode, the point recognized when clicking the mouse
is the magnetic grid point closest to the mouse cursor.
Missler Software 77
Profiles
The main use of the sketch is to create one or more profiles, which are then used for different
things (e.g. to define an extruded shape, see later).
A profile is a series of segments strung together to form a single unique geometry, with each
segment forming a simple curve geometry: line, circle arc, etc.
Joined segments are automatically sewn together into a single vertex (an extremity of an
open segment). Simply create the segments using the different commands (the line command,
for example). The sewn profiles are shown with a continuous thick dashed line, while non-
sewn segments are shown with a thick dotted line.
Segments for construction
Profiles
A segment that is not joined to any other segment is a mono-segment profile, represented
as a continuous thick dotted line.
When a profile is open, i.e. the start of its first segment is not sewn together with the end of its
last segment, its ends are highlighted with green circles, which helps you detect sewing
problems when the "hole" is very small.
When the sketch contains several profiles, they must be disjoint, such as two rectangles
arranged with one inside the other. Except in some cases, it is generally better to make
several sketches containing a single profile than one sketch containing several profiles.
When you want to find out how many profiles, segments, etc. are in an existing sketch, just
select it and use the "Analyze" contextual command.
A very convenient command for quickly and easily creating most simple profiles for lines and
arcs is the "2D Sketch > Contour..." command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
78 Missler Software
Sections
When a sketch contains one or more profiles, you can create sections using the "2D Sketch >
Section..." command.
A section is defined by limiting profiles that must not intersect, as invalid results may be
produced.
Open profiles are supported and are considered as being closed by the line joining the two
ends.
The same profile cannot belong to two different sections.
It is not necessary to create sections in order to define an extruded shape from a sketch,
unless you want to use some – but not all – of the sketch profiles. The system considers the
section defined by all sketch profiles.
A section can be hatched in various ways, as described in the online help.
Construction
It is sometimes useful to create geometries without profiles in sketches for building purposes.
Specifically, it is possible to create isolated points using the "2D Sketch > Point..." command.
You can also create segments for construction that will not be included in profiles. To do this,
run the "2D Sketch > Modes > Construction" command before using the geometry creation
commands. You should turn off this mode when you have finishing creating construction
geometry.
Construction type segments are represented by a thin dash dotted line.
You can convert a construction segment into a normal segment and vice versa. To do this,
simply select the segment and use the "Construction" or "Not Construction" popup command.
Missler Software 79
Constructions geometries are only visible when editing the sketch, so they are said to be
"internal".
By default, construction segments are internal, but you can change this by selecting the
segment and using the "Internal" or "Not Internal" popup command.
By default, sketches contain two construction segments in an infinite line to form the X axis
and the Y axis of the sketch (just as the document's X, Y, and Z axes make up the model's
absolute axes). These segments can neither be modified nor deleted. They are initially
internal, but that can be changed.
Constraints
Created geometries maintain their shape and position in relation to the sketch frame when the
model is updated. They are therefore totally viable, but it is generally useful to explicitly
constrain them.
This is done using constraint entities, of which there are two types:
• Dimensions are constraints defined by a numeric value (linear dimension, angular
dimension, etc.).
• Relations are constraints defined without a numeric value (coincidence, perpendicularity,
etc.).
The general command "2D Sketch > Constraints > Constraint..." allows you to create
dimensions and most relationships. This is used most often (see the online help). You can also
create each type of relationship using commands in the "2D Sketch > Constraints > Relations"
menu (useful especially when you want to create several relationships of the same type).
By default, relations are visible while editing a sketch, and they are represented by graphical
symbols. You can hide them using the "2D Sketch > Modes > Show relations" command.
80 Missler Software
Dimensions
Relations
Constraints can be established between the sketch's geometries and between a geometry
within the sketch and one outside of the sketch. For example, if you make a sketch on a block
face, you can list a line of the sketch in relation to an edge of the block.
When a geometry outside of the sketch is not in the sketch's plane, its projection on the plane
is used. You can disable this mode and then ignore geometries that are not in the sketch's
plane, using the "2D Sketch > Modes > Projection" command.
To make sketch modeling more efficient, you can automate the creation of some dimensions
and relations. This is done using the "2D Sketch > Modes > Automatic Dimensions" and "2D
Sketch > Modes > Automatic Relations" commands.
When these modes are enabled, then when you create a rectangle from two points, its sides
are constrained in their orientation (automatic relations), and two sides are created for these
two dimensions (automatic dimensions).
The alignment relations between the vertices are sometimes a nuisance. This is why they are
created automatically only when you explicitly request it, using the "2D Sketch > Modes >
Automatic alignments" command.
Very often when creating a sketch, you repeatedly change the value of the dimension you just
created (by double-clicking the dimension's text). It is then worth using the "2D Sketch >
Modes > Ask Dimension Value" command, which can automate this.
Regarding symmetrical parts, it is possible to draw only the main part by activating the "2D
Sketch > Modes > Dynamic Symmetry" command and choosing one or two symmetry axes.
Thus, all the created elements are automatically mirrored according to the defined axes.
Symmetry constraints are represented by small arrows pointing toward the symmetry axis.
It is also worth noting that linear and angular dimensions can be centered around a line. This
makes it possible, for example, to easily center a rectangle around the X and Y axes by
centering its dimensions. The centering can be done when creating the dimension or later,
Missler Software 81
using the dimension's contextual command. When a dimension is centered, its text is
enclosed in "=" signs.
Constraint Level
It is generally good practice to fully constrain the geometries of the sketch, which guarantees
that all of the dimensions are expressed by dimensions, with all others constrained by
relations, ensuring that the designer has fully thought it through, not that it came about by
accident.
This also makes it possible to control the general behavior of the sketch when modifying a
dimension's value: The sketch is updated for all of the constraints, which leads to a unique
solution for the fully constrained case.
TopSolid offers help with this, by representing the geometries of the sketch in a different color,
based on their level of constraint while the sketch is being edited.
• Magenta: The geometry is under-constrained. It can be modified while respecting the
constraints of the sketch.
• Blue: The geometry is fully constrained. The sketch's constraints fully define the
geometry's shape and position.
• Gray: The geometry is fixed.
When all of the sketch geometries are fully constrained or fixed, we say that the sketch is fully
constrained. Otherwise, we say it is under-constrained.
There may also be too many constraints. When some dimensions are redundant, for example,
the sketch is said to be over-constrained. It can even be invalid if the values of the redundant
dimensions are incompatible.
Obviously, you should avoid making over-constrained sketches. When you try to create a
redundant dimension, it is created as inactive (grayed out) by default. If you want the
dimension to constrain the sketch, you should then activate it manually (after eliminating
redundancies) by selecting it and using the "Activate" contextual command.
82 Missler Software
Redundant dimensions
Under-constrained area
Under-constrained Fully constrained Over-constrained
Axis of Revolution
When a sketch is intended to define the profile of a revolved shape (see later), it is possible
and useful to define the axis of revolution at the sketch level. This is done using the "2D
Sketch > Define Revolution Axis..." command.
The sketch's axis of revolution may be its X axis, its Y axis, or an axis defined outside of the
sketch. By default, the axis of revolution for a sketch is its X axis.
Once the axis of revolution has been defined, you can use the special "2D Sketch >
Constraints > Revolution dimension..." command, which allows you to make half-dimensions
along the diameter around the axis of revolution, which is very useful for modeling revolved
parts.
In addition, when you make a revolved shape with the sketch, the sketch's axis of revolution
will be offered by default as the axis of the revolved shape, which saves time.
If the sketch's axis of revolution is changed later, this will also update the shape to avoid
causing errors.
Missler Software 83
Modification
Quite frequently, you have to make modifications to a sketch, whether it is one you have just
created or one that already exists.
If it is pre-existing, you must first put it into edit mode, which is done simply by selecting it (in
the graphics or in the entity tree in the sketch folder) and using the "Edit" contextual command,
found in the "Solving (<sketch name>)" section of the context menu.
To delete a geometry or a constraint from the sketch, simply select it and use the "Delete"
contextual command or press the "Del" key on the keyboard. You can select multiple items
using the "Ctrl" key on the keyboard or by highlighting them with the mouse by clicking and
then moving the mouse cursor, keeping the (left) button pressed.
To copy a geometry or constraint from the sketch, select it and click while pressing the "Ctrl"
key on the keyboard, then move the mouse cursor, keeping the (left) button pressed, and
release it at the desired location. You can select multiple items here as well.
To move a geometry (a vertex or a segment), do just like a copy, without pressing the "Ctrl"
key on the keyboard. Multiple selection is not possible for moving elements. By default,
movement minimizes any modification to the sketch. It is also possible to use an alternative
movement method (while keeping the keyboard's "Alt" key pressed), which is more universal.
For example, when moving the vertex of an unconstrained rectangle, the rectangle becomes
misshapen in normal mode, but it keeps its shape in the alternative mode.
Several commands are also available for performing some common modifications: fillets,
chamfers, limitations, etc. See the online help for detailed information on how to use these
commands.
To exit the sketch edition without keeping the modifications, click on the red cross icon located
on the rigth side of the end edition icon. Then a confirmation message is displayed.
84 Missler Software
Cancel edition
Variables
When providing dimensions on a sketch, you can use parameters, or formulas that use
parameters, to define the value of a dimension. That is, you can give "d + 3 * e" as the value
for a dimension, if "d" and "e" are existing parameters. (If they are not basic parameters, they
must be defined chronologically before the sketch. Otherwise, they will produce an error. See
earlier chapters.)
This can solve most problems, but it does not let you model proportional relations such as:
This dimension must be equal to two times another dimension, without knowing the value of
the dimension.
For this, use the concept of a variable and equation.
To create a variable, run the "2D Sketch > Constraints > Variable..." command, select the
variable type (angle or length), provide its name, and click OK. Variables are specific to each
sketch, and you can see them by unbending the sketch in the " Sketches " folder of the entity
tree.
Once the variable is created, you can associate it to a dimension by selecting the dimension
and using the " Make Variable... " contextual command. The dimension text will be replaced by
the variable name.
All of the dimensions associated to a single variable will be kept at the same value at the end
of the sketch. This allows there to be equality relationships between dimensions, and it may be
useful in removing the need to create equations.
If you want to go further, you can then use the "2D Sketch > Constraints > Equations..." command
to create equations between the variables, such as "b = 2 * a". Equations are specific to each
sketch, and you can see them by unbending the sketch in the " Sketches " folder of the entity tree.
The various operators available for writing equations are described in detail in the online help.
The following example shows a simple case in which a profile "U" is created, whose total
length is known. We want the inside of "U" to be equal to twice the thickness of the sides,
which are the same thickness as one another. (We created two variables "a" and "b" and an
equation "b = 2 * a").
Missler Software 85
Operations
Everything we have seen until now allows you to create most of the profiles you will have to
do, but you may encounter some limits in some scenarios:
• The type of curve you want to model is not supported (e.g. a sinusoidal).
• The sketch should contain a profile parallel to a profile outside of the sketch, and it should
be able to adapt to a change in the number of basic profile segments during an update (ex.
to make a flange that adjusted when the number of sides to the shape varies).
• The sketch has groups of segments that must be repeated a variable number of times,
based on a parameter (e.g. to make a family of pinions).
In these situations, and more generally when the method presented earlier does not let you
accomplish the design you need, you can use another method for modeling sketches, based
on an order of operations.
This method can be used independently or alongside the "normal" method. So, you can make
a sketch as specified earlier and then apply operations to it.
The sketch operation creation commands are stored in the "2D Sketch > Operations"
submenu.
The following example presents the result of creating a rectangle based on constraints and
then creating a parallel operation and a fillet operation.
86 Missler Software
In the operations tree, you can see that, to arrive at the result, you need a sketch solving
operation for computing a rectangle that satisfies the constraints, as well as an offset
operation and a fillet operation.
All of these operations are stored in a global operation, called building, which allows them to
be manipulated more simply, especially for moving them and deleting them at once in the
operations tree.
In fact, when you do not use sketch operations, there are no operations between the solving
and the building. The place remains available, however, and you can add to it at any time,
making TopSolid very flexible.
To add an operation in an existing sketch, you should first edit it by selecting it (in the graphics
or in the entity tree's sketches folder) and using the "Edit" command located in the "Solving
section (<sketch name>)" of the context menu. Next, run the desired operation creation
command, which edits the building operation (you can also edit this operation directly by
selecting it in the operations tree). TopSolid then displays the state of the sketch, given the
operations that may have already been created, and the color goes back to normal since the
concept of a constraint level means nothing for resolving constraints. Then complete the
command dialog and click OK.
To delete a sketch operation, like the other operations, simply select it and use the "Delete"
contextual command.
Finally, to modify a sketch operation, select it and use the "Edit" contextual command.
For example, to make a spiral spring, you can use a curve creation operation by formula
(spiral), followed by a parallelization operation, then create two lines to join the two profiles,
and extrude (see later) it all.
Missler Software 87
Checking
It is sometimes useful to ensure that the created sketches are of good quality. This often
avoids having invalid results later when performing an operation using that sketch (for
instance the creation of an extruded shape based on a sketch).
If the error is not detected immediately, time must be spent finding out that this is because the
sketch is not good enough, and not on why the operation became invalid.
Using the "2D Sketch > Options..." command, it is possible to tune the level of checking
performed when updating the sketch.
Several conditions can be verified (checkboxes in the "Verification" section):
• No Self-Intersecting: sketches containing self-intersecting profiles (for instance like a figure
of " eight ") are considered invalid.
• No Under-Constrained: sketches which are not fully constrained are considered invalid.
88 Missler Software
Texts
You can add text to a sketch by using the "2D Sketch > Text..." command, which is detailed in
the online help.
Created text is stored in the sketch entity along with the dimensions, and you can see them in
the entity tree by unbending the sketch.
Additionally, when a text is created, a sketch operation is also created to add the text letter
contours to the sketch profiles, which then makes it possible to have "solid" text by extrusion
or even engravings by making a pocket on an existing shape.
If the text was created only for the purpose of annotation, you can delete this operation to
avoid modifying the geometry of the sketch.
Sketch text profiles creation
Sketch text entity
Missler Software 89
90 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Spatial Sketches
Spatial Sketches
Missler Software 91
Spatial Sketches TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
Planar sketches are the most used, and they allow you to make most of the profiles needed for
your modeling.
However, there are cases in which the profiles you need are not planar, such as when
modeling pipes or even a spring.
You would then need to use a spatial sketch.
Roughly speaking, a spatial sketch is like a planar sketch, without the constraint of needing to
be contained in a plane. We will therefore not cover here the points related to a planar sketch
that also apply for a spatial sketch.
The remainder of this chapter presents the essential differences.
The commands for creating and manipulating spatial sketches are found in the menu: "3D
Sketch".
Planes
A spatial sketch may contain planes that may contain constraints like the other geometries.
Specifically, every spatial sketch starts with three orthogonal planes, corresponding to the XY,
XZ, and YZ planes of the sketch frame, in addition to infinite construction lines for the axes, as
in the planar sketch. These geometric elements cannot be modified.
Plane
Axis
Input Plane
Like a planar sketch, a spatial sketch is defined by a frame that allows you to enter
coordinates, here in three dimensions: X, Y, and Z. Its position is defined the same way as for
a planar sketch, and it can be modified by the "3D Sketch > Position sketch..." command.
92 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Spatial Sketches
Herein lies the problem if having to create points using the mouse cursor, which moves in only
two directions!
For this, TopSolid supports the concept of an input plane, which is the plane that supports the
grid and whose origin and main directions are indicated by the same symbol used to represent
the frame for the planar sketch. (The spatial sketch frame is not shown, but it coincides with
the initial position of the input plane frame.)
You can define the input plane using the "3D Sketch> Position input plane..." command.
When you are in the process of entering the geometry, you can also make it go to the last point
entered by pressing the "Ctrl" and "Space" bar simultaneously. Pressing it the first time moves
the input plane, and the other times make it turn.
Missler Software 93
Spatial Sketches TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
94 Missler Software
TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Shapes
Shapes
Missler Software 95
Shapes TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
Shapes are the fundamental entity type for modeling mechanical parts, so it is worth carefully
clarifying what they are, particularly to establish the vocabulary that will be used to describe
them.
A shape is defined using faces that can be limited by edges, which themselves end (if they
are open) at vertices.
A series of contiguous edges belonging to a single face is called a loop. A loop delimits the
outer edge of the face, or even a hole in the face.
Loop
Edge
Face
Vertex
A shape can be either a solid or a surface.

A solid shape has a volume defined by a set of articulated faces. It should not have any
"leaks", or else the volume is undefined. Also, the shape should not have a border edge (i.e.
an edge connected to a single face).
A surface shape is an object without any thickness, made up only of a set of articulated faces
and unconstrained in terms of the shape's watertightness. If the shape does not have a border
edge, the surface is said to be closed. Otherwise, it is said to be open.
Surface shapes are generally used in intermediary modeling constructions because they have
no physical reality.
During some operations (especially when a shape is subtracted from another), a shape (solid
or surface) can be divided into several separate pieces, called bodies. Multi-body shapes are
supported, but they also generally correspond to intermediary modeling states.
When you would like to know if a given shape is a solid or a surface and you know the number
of faces, edges, etc., select and use the "Analyze" contextual command.
The remainder of this chapter explains how to create and manipulate shapes.
96 Missler Software
Creation
There are several commands available for creating shapes.
The simplest are for primitive solids, such as blocks, cylinders, cones, and spheres. These
commands are grouped at the top of the "Primitive > Shapes" menu. They are relatively
intuitive to use, but you can refer to detailed use information in the online help.
In some cases, you can create a simple shape and then modify it using modification
operations (see below).
In most cases, however, because the starting point for modeling a shape defines the part,
creating an extruded shape, or even a revolved shape, would be too great of a modification.
In both cases, you must first make a planar sketch, as indicated earlier, and then use the
"Shape > Extruded..." or "Shape > Revolved..." command (see online help for use).
Since this manipulation is frequently used, there are several shortcuts available to save you
time.
First, if you select a sketch, the commands for creating an extruded or revolved shape are
available in the context menu and are therefore directly accessible by "right-clicking".
Also, to make it faster, the commands to edit a sketch are also available in the context menu.
If you use them, TopSolid assumes that you want to then finish editing the sketch and go
directly to creating the base shape for the sketch.
When stringing together the creation of a sketch with an operation to create or modify the
shape that uses it, the operations related to the sketch are absorbed into the shape's
operation, and rather than one being above the other in the operation tree, one is inside the
other.
This keeps the operation tree clean because we only see the first level of the shape operation,
and it keeps all of the operations concerning the sketch together in case the shape operation
moves within the order.
Extrusion operation
Absorbed sketch operations
Missler Software 97
Similarly, if the shape operation is deleted, the sketch operations contained within it are also
deleted, which is normal because they are interdependent.
If you do not want this behavior (for example, you may want to delete the shape operation
without deleting the sketch), you can "unabsorb" it using the "Extract Sketch" contextual
command for the shape operation.
The document shapes are stored in the "Shapes" folder in the entity tree. This folder is
created once there is at least one shape in the document, so you will see it appear when
creating the first shape.
Modification
Once the base shape has been created, you should generally apply a number of modifications
to it in order to get the desired final shape.
This is done through a series of commands in the "Shape" menu for operations that can
modify the shape. These commands are listed after the creation commands.
The most common operations are those for making a pocket (removal of material) or a boss
(addition of material) by extrusion of a planar sketch.
You can also create an intermediary shape, called a tool shape and add it to, subtract it from,
or intersect it with (these operations are more generally called Boolean operations) the main
shape by using the "Shape > Boolean..." command.
There are other available operations that do not require sketches or intermediary shapes to be
created, including fillet shapes, chamfer, etc.
The online help explains how to use the available commands in your version of the software.
Repetition
In some cases, an operation like a pocket or boss must be made in exactly the same way in
different locations of a shape based on a repeated pattern.
The fastest way is to create the first operation and repeat it using the "Shape > Repetition..."
command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
Healing
The geometry of certain shapes resulting from the import of external data may be of poor
quality.
Several types of problems may occur:
• Certain faces or edges may be very small.
• Certain faces may have not been properly joined.
• Certain edges may not have been located precisely at the intersection of neighboring
faces.
• ...
This type of problem could make modeling operations you want to apply to the shape (fillet,
pocket, etc.) fail, so they must be rectified wherever possible and therefore "heal" the shape.
First, you can use the "Surface > Healing > Check..." command to identify possible problems.
If problems are actually detected, it will then be possible to perform an initial automatic repair
using the "Surface > Healing > Clean..." command.
It is also possible to go further, by simplifying the geometry of the shape when possible, while
respecting a certain tolerance (the simplified shape will not differ from the initial shape higher
than this value). This is done by using the "Surface > Repair > Simplify..." command.
98 Missler Software
For example, certain CAD systems export cylindrical faces in the form of B-spline surfaces
containing a very high number of control points. It is then worth replacing them with exact
cylindrical faces.
It is also possible to complete the full process by running the "Surface > Healing > Heal..."
command, which will guide you through a series of steps and processes resulting in a valid
sewn-together shape made from unsewn imported shapes (by checking the cleaning option).
Comparison
When a customer sends a new version of a part in a neutral file format that must be imported
with conversion, the question arises: what are the differences from what was sent previously?
The "Shape > Comparison > Compare..." command answers this question, which is explained
in detail in the online help.
Generally, the previous version has been used to model other parts, and will reflect the
detected changes.
This task can be very time consuming, and particularly prone to errors.
To make your work easier, you can replace the existing shape with the new one, while
maintaining the associativity as much as possible, with the "Shape > Comparison >
Replace..." command, which is explained in detail in the online help.
Missler Software 99
100 Missler Software

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide FreeShapes
FreeShapes
Missler Software 101

FreeShapes TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
The previous chapter presented the different methods for creating and modifying shapes in an
associative way, using operations whose chronology can be viewed in the operations tree.
This method of modeling shapes is very powerful because it enables complex geometries to
be made (pipe, variable fillet, etc.) and to adapt to major design changes: if you move a shape
that acts as a tool for a subtraction, the resulting shape may be very different, although this is
managed automatically when updated.
However, it does have its disadvantages, namely:
• If you need to make a modification not limited to modifying an existing operation, it may be
difficult to do because certain operations will need to be deleted, others will need to be
created, and the remainder will need to be repaired so that everything still works.
• If you have to work on an imported part, you can't modify the operations because there
aren't any (it is however possible to create new operations capable of modifying the
shape's geometry).
This is why, when working with an imported shape, you may want to handle it like a sketch,
moving faces (instead of segments for the sketch) with the mouse, or using dimensions or
relations that would impose constraints.
This is made possible using the FreeShape command.
Conversion
When you import a file containing geometric solids, the shapes of the parts produced are non-
associative by default, but they can also be FreeShapes by way of the "Tools > Options..."
command in the "Interfaces" section.
You can also create a FreeShape by converting an existing shape with the "FreeShape >
FreeShape..." command, "Convert" option.
Converting deletes all the operations that create and modify the shape and creates a new
"FreeShape" operation to handle the shape as a FreeShape (similar to how constraints are
solved in sketches with a "Solving" operation).
For example, the following shape created by extrusion, fillet and drilling:

Will be converted to the following FreeShape:
The shape produced is geometrically identical, but is handled in a totally different way.
Warning: FreeShape faces and edges are considered new, and everything that was "hooked"
to the shape before conversion will lose its hooking (for example if a sketch has been created
using a face as a support plane), so you will need to make repairs as needed. Usually,
converting to FreeShape is done at the very beginning of the design process, and therefore
the problem should occur only in exceptional cases.
Modification
Instead of performing a conversion, you can also perform a modification operation, which will
preserve the entire history of the shape's existing construction, and will only modify it.
This is done in the same way as before, except by choosing "Modify" instead of "Convert" in
the command dialog.

Editing
A FreeShape can be modified the same way as a sketch. Simply edit it first, then add
constraints (dimensions or relations).
Certain modifications can also be made directly with the mouse by selecting a face and
moving the mouse without releasing the button.
During the creation of the FreeShape (conversion or modification), all faces are fixed, and
therefore it is necessary to first unfix the faces to be modified. This is done by selecting them
and using the "Unlock Part" popup command.
Constraint Level
It is generally good practice to fully constrain the faces of the FreeShape, which guarantees
that all of the dimensions are expressed by dimensions, with all others constrained by
relations, ensuring that the designer has fully thought it through, not that it came about by
accident.
As with a sketch, TopSolid helps to achieve this by marking faces of the FreeShape in a
different color, based on their constraint level while the FreeShape is being edited:
• Magenta: The face is under-constrained. It can be modified while respecting the
constraints of the FreeShape.
• Blue: The face is fully constrained. The FreeShape's constraints fully define the face's
shape and position.
• Gray: The face is fixed.
• Yellow: The face is not constrainable (the type of geometry is not supported by the solver).
When all of the FreeShape faces are fully constrained or fixed, we say that the FreeShape is
fully constrained. Otherwise, we say it is under-constrained.
Automatic Constraints
In order to prevent having too many degrees of freedom, which would lead to unmanageable
behavior, it is often worth imposing natural constraints, e.g. the fact that a planar face
maintains its orientation.
Other common constraints involve maintaining the coaxiality of two aligned drillings or of
several faces that make up the same drilling (smooth hole with spot facing).
This is done by using the "Constrain Automatically..." command.

Extraction
The main advantage of FreeShape is to allow quick and easy handling of a shape that is
primarily composed of faces with simple geometries: plane, cylindrical, spherical, etc.
Therefore, it is often worth "removing" all of the small complex faces that could cause
problems during the solving process.
Specifically, if the shape contains fillets or chamfers, they should be extracted, i.e. removed
from the "solving" portion, so you can perform standard operations on them on the solved
shape, with the resulting shape being exactly the same.
To do this, edit the FreeShape and use the "FreeShape > Extract Fillet or Chamfer..."
command.
For example, when, after importing a part, the following FreeShape containing a chamfer on
the upper face is obtained:

It's in your best interest to extract it, which will result in the same shape, but this time
performing two operations:
• The FreeShape operation, which controls the shape without the chamfer.
• The chamfer operation, which modifies this shape by adding the chamfer.
Warning: The geometry produced by the new operation can sometimes differ from the
geometry before extraction. You should check to ensure that it is satisfactory. In addition, the
faces and edges produced by this operation are considered new, which can cause some
things to become "unhooked", like for conversion.
Removing
Sometimes, you may want to perform extractions in situations not controlled by the previous
command:
• Variable fillet.
• Complex chamfer.
• Type of operations not supported: drilling, pocket...
You then need to do it manually.
First, remove the relevant faces using the "FreeShape > Remove Faces..." command.
Next, create the operation(s) producing the equivalent geometry using the commands ad-hoc
in the "Shape" menu.
To prevent the following operations from being disrupted, it may be useful to place the
insertion cursor just after solving the FreeShape throughout the entire process, which could be
called "performing surgery"...

Insertion
Conversely, you may sometimes wish to add faces to a FreeShape so you can control them
using constraints.
In this case, you need to modify the shape using standard operations (pocket, boss, etc.), and
use the "FreeShape > Grab Operation..." command.
Dimensions
Once the geometry of the FreeShape has been finalized, it will be possible to constrain it by
adding dimensions using the "FreeShape > Dimension..." command, like for a sketch.
Relations
As with dimensions, it will also be possible to impose relations between faces using
commands in the "FreeShape > Relations" menu.
Constructions
It is sometimes necessary to create the geometry of an intermediate construction, such as
the axes of drillings so that the distance between the axes can be constrained.
This is possible by using the different commands to create points, axes or planes in the
"FreeShape" menu.
These geometries are stored in a companion spatial sketch of the shape called a
"Construction Sketch".


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Parts
Parts

Parts TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
A mechanical part is represented as a "Part" document.
This document contains the part definition that can be used in other assemblies, which then
contain one or more occurrences of the part.
Generally, creating a part involves modeling it by using the available commands and then
assigning its various non-geometric properties (description, material, etc.).
This chapter covers the primary actions required to fully define a part.
Stages
A part document contains several stages, presented here chronologically:
• Modeling Stage: This stage contains operations for modeling the geometry of the part,
which generally consists of a shape entity. The majority of the work will be done in this
stage.
• Analysis Stage: This stage contains analysis operations of the part, and in particular the
stage that calculates the mass of the part (if this is requested). Since modeling is done in
the previous stage, the operations of this stage will have the final status of the part's
geometry.
• Annotation Stage: The stage contains operations managing how the part is annotated,
particularly its tolerancing.
Representations
When modeling a part, you can create several shapes, some of which will be used as tools for
union or subtraction operations.
Others may be used in the background, without being directly involved in the part's modeling.
All of these shapes are kept in the shapes folder in the same way, which leads to the following
question: Which shape corresponds to the part's geometry?
To answer this question, TopSolid offers the concept of representation.
Representations are the different ways to see the same part, from various perspectives. They
are entities arranged in the "Representations" folder in the entity tree.
One of these representations is special. It is the detailed representation, which defines the
exact contents of the part using shortcuts to the entities that make it up.
When this representation does not contain any shortcuts, as in the beginning, the part is
empty. Needless to say, you should avoid having empty parts.
When making a block, the detailed representation contains a shortcut to "Shape 1", which is
the only shape in the document.
By default, the first shape that is created is assumed to represent the geometry of the part,
which is quite often the case.
However, when shapes are created and deleted, this assumption is no longer valid, and you
must decide for yourself which entity truly represents the part.
You then must edit the detailed representation by removing the shortcuts to the entities that do
not represent the part (by selecting them in the tree and deleting them) and by adding
shortcuts to the entities that do represent it (by selecting the entity in the tree and dragging it to
the representation, which creates a new shortcut).
The detailed representation for a part is generally a single shape, but it may sometimes be
necessary for it to contain several shapes. Parts with multiple shapes are supported, but they
are rarely used. We recommend avoiding them if you do not have a good reason to use them.
The detailed representation is the exact definition of the part, and the part's mass will be
calculated by analyzing the contents of this representation.

As you can see, the representations folder initially contains another representation, the
design representation.
This representation is what you should use to work on the part, and it is quite often the same
thing as the detailed representation. When you manually modify the detailed representation,
you should also plan to modify the design representation in the same way.
You can create another special representation, the simplified representation, using the
"Tools > Representations > Simplified Representation" command.
Representations
The contents of this representation defines a simplified geometric description of the part,
which may be used in assemblies to clean up the view. (By default, when a part is included in
an assembly and it has a simplified representation, the simplified representation will be used.)
Typically, the simplified representation of the part will consist of its modeling in an intermediate
stage, such as before creating fillets and beveled chamfers.
In this case, the easiest way to create the simplified representation is to move the insertion
cursor to where you want it in the sequence, select the shape, and use the "Others > Duplicate
into Representation..." contextual command and select the "Simplified" option. This creates an
operation that is a copy of the shape, and it creates a shortcut in the simplified representation.
In the most complicated cases, like those in which the simplified representation is not an
intermediate state of the modeling of the final shape, it is best to model a suitable shape and to
create the shortcut in the simplified representation yourself.
When you have several representations, you can move between them using the drop-down
list found in the toolbar in the "Tools" menu.
In addition to the representations mentioned here, you can create your own representations
using the general "Tools > Representations > Representation…" command.

Materials
When creating a new part from a blank template, the material it is made of is not defined.
Because of this, some functionalities are not available: realistic rendering, the mass
calculation, inclusion in a dynamic simulation, etc.
To define the material for a part, use the "Tools > Material and Coating..." command. Another
option is to find the document that represents the material (either by searching or by drawing
directly from a library) and then dragging and dropping the search result or library tree from the
material document into the part document.
The name of the material document then displays in the "Material" folder under the
"Parameters" folder in the entity tree, as "Material = name". (When the part's material is
undefined, TopSolid displays "Material = <unspecified>").
The material's known characteristics cause parameters to be created in the "Material" folder.
The material parameters are used like the other parameters to work on the part. Specifically,
the mass calculation for the part (see above) uses the material's "Density" parameter.
Material parameters are automatically updated when the part's material changes or when the
definition of the material used changes.
This makes it possible to define special material like "Plastic 1", which can be used to design
parts and whose exact definition is provided later. The parts will then be updated
automatically!
This method also makes it possible to do successive simulations, for example to optimize an
assembly's mass in order to satisfy requirements.
Specified material
Parameters inherited
from the material
Coating
By the same principle, you can assign a coating to the part.

When a part has both a material and a coating, some of the part's properties are inherited from
one or the other.
For example, the part's density depends on the material alone.
On the other hand, for the realistic color of the part, the coating color must be used, not the
material's color.
You can also assign a coating to only some of the part's faces, using the " Shape > Other
Operations > Coating..." command.
Fibers
When using a material or coating that is inhomogeneous (meaning that it does not have the
same properties in all places) or anisotropic (meaning that it does not have the same
properties in all directions), you must specify to TopSolid the origin (if inhomogeneous) and the
direction (if anisotropic) of the fibers.
This is done using the "Tools > Fibers..." command.
For example, if you are making a solid wood part, you must place the origin of the fibers at the
axis of the trunk and assign the first direction coming from the trunk.
Once this is done, the rendering of the part will be accurate, and the part's hatching in the
drawing will also be accurate.
Physical Properties
You can define some physical properties for a part in order to use them in certain
circumstances, such as research, the bill of material, analysis, dynamic simulation, etc.
The available physical properties include:
• Mass: The part's mass is necessary for performing dynamic simulations. The mass is
defined using the "Mass" parameter, located in the parameters folder.
• Center of mass: The part's center of mass is necessary for performing dynamic
simulations. The center of mass is defined using the "Center of Mass Point", located in the
points folder.
• Moments of inertia: The moments of inertia from the axes of a main frame of inertia are
necessary for performing dynamic simulations. The principal frame of inertia is defined
using the "Principal Frame", located in the points folder, and the moments of inertia are
defined using the "Principal X Moment", "Principal Y Moment", and "Principal Z Moment"
parameters, located in the parameters folder.
• Surface: The part's surface area may be used, for example, to calculate how much paint is
required to paint the part. The surface area is defined using the "Surface Area" parameter,
located in the parameters folder.
• Volume: The part's volume can be used in the bill of materials to determine quantities to
arrive at a price. The volume is defined using the "Volume" parameter, located in the
parameters folder.
Each property can be managed differently:
• Automatic: TopSolid automatically calculates the property by analyzing the contents of the
part's detailed representation (its exact definition). The automatic calculation of the mass
and moments of inertia also require the part's density to be defined, as well as its material.
If the part has a coating and it has a surface density, that will be included.
• Manual: The user defines the property value. This mode is especially useful when you
want to do simulations when the part is not fully modeled, but an estimate of its physical
properties is known.

• Non-managed: The property is not managed. In this mode, the corresponding parameters
are not in the part document, which simplifies it when the physical properties are not used.
The mode selection and the values to be used for the manually managed properties are
available through the "Tools > Physical Properties…" command.
It may be tedious to automatically calculate some properties for complex parties, which wastes
time.
So as not to decrease productivity, the calculations are done in the analysis stage, which
occurs only when the document is current or saved.
You can then work on the part's modeling (modeling stage) without being adversely affected
by untimely calculations of the mass or center of mass!
If you want a result at a given time (to verify that you have not exceeded a critical mass), you
can run the "TopSolid > Edit > Update All" command, which causes the document to
completely refresh.
Derived Parts
When you want to create several similar parts, the easiest approach is to make one and then
make the rest by copying the document from the first one in the project tree. You can then
simply modify them as necessary.
This method results in several independent parts, which may be what you want.
However, this is not the best method if the different parts have a major part in common that
may change over time, because each modification would then need to be made to each part
individually (time-consuming and error-prone). Instead, you should use derived parts.
A derived part is defined like any other part, except that its original state (before any operation)
matches the final state of another part, called the base part.
So, all of the operations for modeling the shared portion must be done in the base part, and
the operations specific to each part must be done in the derived parts.
You can have several levels of derivation, with a part derived from a derived part.
To create a derived part from a base part, you must first open the definition document for the
base part and then run the " Tools > Derivations > Derived Part... " command, which creates
the new part in a given project. Its use is described in detail in the online help.
Redimensionned Parts
When tolerances are used on design dimensions, you may want the part corresponding to the
mean, minimum, or maximum value of some dimensions.
For example, a part designed and drafted using nominal values cannot be machined as such.
You can create this new redimensionned part by making a derived part (explained above)
and using the "Tools > Derivations > Redimensioning..." command, as described in the online
help.
Mirror Parts
A part is referred to as symmetrical if it can be superposed on its image in a mirror, otherwise
it is referred to as asymmetrical (in chemistry, an asymmetrical molecule is referred to as
"chiral", but let's not bring these coined terms into mechanics...).
When a mirror symmetry of an assembly is required (to do the left side of a car once the right
side has been done, for example), the original assembly's symmetrical parts may be re-used
by simple repositioning, while the asymmetrical parts can't.

Mirror symmetry of an asymmetrical part is a different part, in that you need to have "left" and
"right" versions of this type of part (one being the mirror image of the other) if you want to put it
into an assembly with mirror symmetry.
Of course, you can model these "left" and "right" parts separately, but that takes time and may
involve errors.
To avoid this, TopSolid lets you quickly make the mirror part from an existing part, maintaining
an association between them. (That is, if the base part is modified, the mirror part is
automatically modified as well.)
In fact, the mirror part works a bit like a derived part, only with a symmetry applied along the
way.
To create a mirror part from a base part, you must first open the definition document for the
base part and then run the "Tools > Derivations > Mirror Part..." command, which creates the
new part in a given project. Its use is described in detailed in the online help.
If the base part is designed in place in an assembly, you should instead open the assembly,
select the part and use the "Others > Mirror Part..." contextual command. This command
synchronizes the mirror part with the assembly where the in-place part is defined and
therefore allows it to be used.
Symmetries
When a part is symmetrical, TopSolid should know so that it can take that into account when
necessary (e.g. when it makes a group of parts symmetrical in the assembly).
Otherwise, it would search for the corresponding mirror part and, when it can't find it, the
mirror symmetry would fail.
To declare a part as symmetrical, you need to define the symmetry elements using the
commands in the "Tools > Symmetries" menu.
A part's symmetric elements are entities in the entity tree's "Symmetries" folder.
Typically, when one makes a part having a revolution symmetry (like a screw), a revolution
symmetry needs to be created by defining the axis of symmetry.
Similarly, when making a part having a symmetrical plane, a plane symmetry needs to be
created by defining that plane.
Note that this means defining the behavior of the part, which may differ from the exact
geometric reality.
For instance, when modeling a lock washer, as its orientation position is of little importance,
we can quite easily consider that it has a revolution symmetry, even if this is not geometrically
true. It is even recommended to do so, because "left" and "right" versions for this washer do
not exist!
The position of symmetrical elements is important, because it will be used to calculate the
movement to be made during the mirror symmetry of the assembly. So, if a symmetrical plane
is declared but the part is not symmetrical around that plane, TopSolid will re-use the same
part during the mirror symmetry of the assembly (because the presence of a symmetrical
element is enough to declare the part as being symmetrical), but its position will not be correct.
Partial Parts
When you have a multi-shaped part (i.e. a part with several shapes in its detailed
representation) after performing operations that cut shapes into several pieces, you may
actually want several single-shaped parts instead.
This enables you to have genuine parts that you can physically produce, with a unique
description and part number, which is necessary, for example, to set up the BOM and its
manufacture.

To do this, open the multi-shape part document and use the "Tools > Derivations > Partial
Parts..." command.
This command will automatically create the same number of special derived parts, called
"partial parts", each representing one of the shapes of the base part, and an overall assembly
grouping them together, with the same name as the initial part.
This assembly may then be used in place of the initial part.
Unsectionability
Some parts should not be cut when a cut is made when drawing an assembly.
This is true, for example, for screws that should not be cut when the cutting plane passes
through the screw's axis or for ball bearings when the cutting plane passes through the center
of the ball.
For accurate drawings, you must specify in TopSolid when a part should not be cut, if
necessary. This is done by creating entities whose name is the mouthful "unsectionability".
The commands for creating them are located in the "Tools > Unsectionabilities" menu.
Inseparable entities are entities grouped in the "Unsectionabilities" folder in the entity tree.
Tolerancing
You can perform Tolerancing on a part in 3D in the part definition document, without making a
draft.
This is particularly useful when you want to adopt an "all 3D" organization, based on the
savings gained from making drafts (parts are sent to sub-contractors electronically, using
TopSolid'Viewer).
Two methods of tolerancing are supported.
The standard method is the easiest to set up, just use the "Tools > Tolerancing > Dimension..."
command to dimension the part, specifying the desired tolerances.

However, this method does have the disadvantage of being unclear in certain cases, which is
why an increasing number of companies opt for the ISO GPS method ("Geometric Product
Specification").
Besides, some prime manufacturers now require that their subcontractors use this more
rigorous method, which eventually provides productivity gains by reducing the number of
defects.
If you prefer to use this tolerancing method, other commands in the "Tools > Tolerancing"
menu can be used, for which the online help provides instructions.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Assemblies
Assemblies

Assemblies TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
A mechanical assembly is represented by an "Assembly" document.
The document includes the assembly definition, which can be used for different higher-level
assemblies, and can contain one or more assembly occurrences (called sub-assemblies).
Designing an assembly generally consists of including and positioning the parts and sub-
assemblies that make it up, and providing information about its non-geometric properties (e.g.
description).
There are however other possible methods, as explained later, each with their own
advantages and disadvantages. It is therefore important to have a good understanding about
them in order to choose the best method based on the given situation.
For articulated assemblies, usually called mechanisms, their kinematics must also be
defined, as explained later in the "Mechanisms" chapter.
This chapter reviews how to completely define an assembly.
Stages
An assembly document contains multiple stages, listed here in chronological order:
• Modeling Stage: This stage includes the operations allowing you to model the assembly,
i.e. creating occurrences of parts of which the assembly consists. The majority of the work
will be done in this stage.
• Analysis Stage: This stage contains analysis operations of the assembly, and in particular
the stage that calculates the mass of the assembly (if this is requested). Since modeling is
done in the previous stage, the operations of this stage will have the final status of the
assembly.
• Mechanism Stage: This stage includes operations for defining, managing and simulating
articulated assemblies. This stage is not present when the assembly is not a mechanism.
• Annotation Stage: This stage includes operations for managing the detailing process of
the assembly.
Design Methods
Generally speaking, there are two main design methods: Bottom-up design and top-down
design.
Bottom-up design
The bottom-up design method consists of creating parts independently and then
reassembling them together using position constraints: frame coincidence, contact between
faces, alignments...
This method has several advantages:
• It allows the assembly to be regenerated quickly and reliably (parts are not dependent on
each other).
• It allows individual parts to be specified and modified independently (no link between the
part and the assembly).
• It enables collaborative work: several people can work on different parts of the same
assembly at the same time.
• It allows you to reuse parts in multiple assemblies.
• It facilitates the management of the parts review process.

Top-down design
The top-down design method consists of working directly in the assembly (or in at least part
of the assembly), and creating parts (known as in place parts) in their operating position by
utilizing the geometry of neighboring parts.
The top-down design method is actually subdivided into two rather different methods,
depending on whether or not the parts designed in place store information about how they
hook to the geometry of supporting parts: associative top-down design and non-associative
top-down design.
The associative top-down design method has the following fundamental benefit :
• If the position or shape of the supporting parts is changed, the in place part is automatically
adjusted, which improves productivity and reduces the risk for errors.
However, this method also comes with the following constraint that can sometimes be a
drawback :
• In place parts are synchronized with the assembly, and cannot exist separately.
The non-associative top-down design method is similar to associative top-down design
during part creation, but produces the same type of data as bottom-up design, since parts are
produced independently with this method.
The advantage of this method is being able to use the geometry of neighboring parts during
creation, which can be helpful, but has the disadvantage of producing non associative entities
in the part construction, which doesn't allow for automatic propagation of changes.
For example, when drilling a part from the assembly using a frame attached to the assembly,
the part definition document will define the drilling as having a fixed non-associative frame in
space, resulting from an image taken at a "t" instant of the frame in the assembly.
Then if the drilled face of the part moves (e.g.: if the extrusion height changes), chances are
that the drilling won't be made where it should...
So:
• If you happen to catch the problem, you must manually change the drilling position (which
isn't easy to do since you must move a frame floating in space, so you waste time).
• Worse case scenario, if you don't catch it, you'll be disappointed at the time of assembly...
The risk of creating these kinds of ticking time bombs, or sources of unproductivity, is why this
method is only recommended when the drawbacks of the associative method are a real
problem.
Hybrid design
Experience has shown that the best solution is when a combination of both bottom-up and top-
down design methods is used, otherwise known as the hybrid design method.
With this method, small subsets and linking parts are made using the top-down design method
(for increased productivity without the trouble of complicated updates, since the number of
parts is kept small), and the complete product is produced by reassembling these subsets.
This method combines and extends the use of both previous methods, since designing
subsets from a single part entails pure bottom-up design, while recognizing the complete
product as a single subset involves pure top-down design.
With hybrid design, you can therefore freely choose the design method that will achieve the
optimal level of productivity by controlling the bottom-up / top-down combination setting
between 0 and 1....
This is the method that is recommended here, and TopSolid was designed to offer the best
support.

Inclusions
The basic action in bottom-up design is to include parts and assemblies using the "Assembly >
Inclusion…" command.
Select the definition document (which must already be opened) for the part or assembly to
include from the drop-down list.
When including an articulated assembly, you must specify the type of inclusion (rigid or
articulated), and if specifying rigid, select its configuration (see below).
You can either place the occurrence precisely on the origin point (check the "Include on origin"
box and validate), or at an approximate location using your mouse (uncheck the "Include on
origin" box, click on the field "Position", then click the position in a view of the assembly
document window.
You can also include a part or assembly by performing a "drag and drop" from the project tree
to the assembly document window. If it is the first inclusion, TopSolid places the part or
assembly at the origin point.
The assembly parts can be located in the "Parts" folder of the entities tree.
Positioning
In the operations tree, you will notice that creating an inclusion also results in creating a
positioning operation in which position constraints can be satisfied.
If the part is placed on origin, TopSolid will also automatically create a fixity constraint to
prevent it from being inadvertently moved.
If no constraint exists, you must create one to define the exact position.
To create a constraint, edit the position by selecting the part and using the "Edit positioning..."
command from the context menu. Once a part is included, its positioning is automatically
ready for editing.
Positioning End positioning editing
Inclusion
Constraint
After defining the positioning, click on the "End editing" button at the top of the graphical area
to exit the positioning editing mode and return to normal mode.

Constraints
The general command "Assembly > Constraint..." is used to create most constraints and is
therefore the command used most frequently (see detailed instructions in the online help).
You can also create each type of constraint using the appropriate commands located in the
menu under this command.
A constraint can be edited by selecting it and using the "Edit" command from the context menu.
A constraint is placed between an entity belonging to the part or positioned assembly,
subsequently referred to as the "source", and the remaining presumed fixed environment,
subsequently referred to as the "destination".
Once the positioning has been determined, the source will be moved to go to the fixed
destination.
To simplify the process of creating constraints, once the source is selected, it is moved
according to where the position of the cursor is when the destination is selected, which lets
you have a preview of the results if you were to validate it, a process known as "dynamic
positioning".
For more complex positioning within blocked assemblies, this process is not very useful and
can therefore be deactivated using the "Assembly > Modes > Dynamic Positioning" command
mode.
When a constraint is created, it appears as a label in the graphical area.
Constraint name
Reverse orientation Constraint value
Reverse sign

The left side of the label contains an icon that shows the type of constraint, and when it is
double-clicked, the source direction is reversed. In the example of a "plane on plane"
constraint, this would edit the constraint and reverse the direction of the source plane.
Some constraints may contain a value, in which case another box for entering the value
appears when the cursor is placed over the label. This box remains displayed as long as the
value is not zero.
Lastly, you can negate the value's sign convention by clicking on the arrow located to the left
of this box.
Constraint Level
In general, it is good practice to fully constrain assembly parts.
This lets you better control the overall behavior of the assembly when a change is made:
positions are updated so as to obey all constraints, producing a single solution for fully
constrained cases.
TopSolid helps to achieve this by marking assembly parts in a different color, based on their
constraint level while their positions are being edited:
• Magenta: The part is under-constrained, which means it can be moved and still obey the
existing positioning constraints.
• Blue: The part is fully constrained, which means the constraints completely define the
position of the part.
• Gray: The part is fixed.
When a part if under-constrained, it is preceded by a "(-)" sign in parts folder of the entity tree.
It is also possible to have too many constraints, in which case the part would be called over-
constrained, and its positioning could even become invalid if redundant constraints are
incompatible.
Grouped Positioning
Parts and assemblies that make up an assembly are usually included sequentially and
positioned in relation to those that were included before them, presumably fixed.
This working method simplifies the process by not "contaminating" everything that happens
after a position is edited.
Nevertheless, it is sometimes necessary to position several parts simultaneously, as when
modeling a "four-bar" using bottom-up design.
This is accomplished by grouping part inclusions in the same position, either by activating the
"Assembly > Modes > Inclusion in Last Positioning" mode before the other parts in the group
are included but after including the first part, or by merging already defined positions by "right-
clicking > Merge Positionings" after selecting the parts.
When using the grouped positioning feature, you can create constraints between the parts you
want to position (not just between the parts and the environment), with the only rule being that
the source and destination of a constraint must move in relation to each another.
If you want to "ungroup" a positioning, simply select the parts to be extracted and use the
"Separate positioning" contextual command.
Attributes
When a part is included in an assembly, its occurrence in the assembly is the same color as
its definition.

In addition, if the color of its definition changes (in other words if you change the color of the
shape that defines the part), the color of the occurrence changes to the same color.
This happens by default following an inclusion, in which the occurrence has no specific color.
You can assign a specific color to the part occurrence using the "Attributes" command from its
context menu, which also allows you to manage other part attributes, such as transparency
and layers.
To undo the previous action, remove the color by using the same command.
This command also allows you to force a part to be rendered in wireframe mode.
Parts Window
The "Parts" folder of the entities tree contains all the parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly.
This folder may contain a lot of entities, and it could be very cumbersome to work with it, in
particular to modify attributes like visibility, color, transparency...
A dedicated tool window, the "Parts" tool window, allows you to manage that in a much easier
way.
To display this window, make it visible by checking that the "TopSolid > View > Part" command
mode is enabled and then anchor the "Parts" tool window to make it visible.
This window allows you to filter the parts list of the document depending on various criteria like
the name, the set or the function (see further).
It displays the list of retained entities, in different possible orders (alphabetical, chronological,
...).
It is then possible to select one or more entities to modify their visibility, color, transparency...
Parts Tree
In addition to the "Parts" folder, the "Parts tree" allows you to list the parts contained in the
assembly. To display this tree, make it visible by checking that the "TopSolid > View > Parts"
command mode is enabled and then anchor the "Parts" tool window to make it visible.
List of filters
List of functions
List of parts and sub-assemblies
We can then see a tree containing a list of parts, arranged chronologically from bottom (first
part included) to top (last part included). The list can be filtered by the sets created in the
assembly document or by the functions as for example all the screws or all the washers.

The icon bar located above the list allows to quickly manage the parts visibility, the part’s
attributes (color, transparency and layer), the ascending or descending sorting of the list and
also a hierarchical (according to the sub-assemblies and parts organisation) or flat view of the
parts.
Creating In Place Parts

This chapter has so far discussed how to include and position parts and assemblies using the
bottom-up method.
We will now review some new features that allow you to work using the top-down method.
This entails being able to create parts directly within the assembly environment by
associatively making use of the assembly.
The first step is to create a new part, known as an "in place part", using the "Modeling >
In Place Part" command (this command is also available from the popup menu).
In place part name

End in place editing
Assembly parts
When an in place part is created, it immediately goes into in place editing mode, and the new
part opens in a window in lieu of the assembly document window (with its name displayed on
the tab). The assembly components appear transparent, and can be utilized as a basis for
modeling the part.
When you are done modeling the part, exit from editing mode by clicking the "End Editing"
button at the top of the graphical area.

When you are done, you may exit from editing mode and return to the assembly in "normal"
working mode.
In place part
You will notice that the new part appears in the parts folder with a special icon, which lets you
quickly identify in place parts.
In place part
You will also notice that an inclusion operation, for including the in place part, has been added
to the operations tree: there is no positioning operation because an in place part is
immediately created in its correct position in the assembly.
In place part inclusion
The new part also appears in the project tree inside the assembly document (a somewhat
unusual location), which is considered a folder used for this particular purpose.

Assembly
In place part
You will also notice that the created part document is "synchronized" with the assembly, as
explained in the "Operations" chapter.
Modifying In Place Parts

There are several ways to modify an in place part:
• Open the part document and proceed as you would for a normal part.
• Edit the in place part in the assembly.
The first method doesn't need any further explanation, since ample instructions are given in
the "Parts" chapter, so let's look at the second method.
First, open the assembly document, select the in place part you want to edit and run the
"In Place Edit" command from the context menu. You can also run this command by double-
clicking the part.
The screen takes you to the same stage as when you first created the in place part, and you
can then proceed to work on the part.
During this stage, you will not see any parts that were created in the assembly after this part,
since the insertion cursor is in the same location as it was during the part creation.
This particularly allows you not to be distracted by parts that would otherwise hide the part you
want to work on.
In addition, it ensures that all part operations are contiguous, and not randomly distributed in
the overall chronology of the assembly.
However, you may need to modify the in place part by basing it on the parts created after it. In
this case, exit from insertion mode by clicking on the document tab icon.
End Inserting
It is possible to come back later to the initial insertion point by clicking on the new document
tab icon.
Insert Before Inclusion

Deleting In Place Parts

To delete an in place part, open the assembly and delete the part by selecting it and using the
"Delete" command from the context menu.
You may also select the part document in the project tree and delete it like any other part.
In Place Editing
You can also perform in place editing on a part that was not created in place but included in
bottom-up design.
To do so, run the in place editing command just as you would for the in place part.
A similar situation is when you edit the in place part, but when the assembly parts are
displayed as a wireframe model.
When you "in place" edit a part that was not created "in place", you will not be able to make
use of the assembly parts, as they are only shown as a visual aid.
Work can proceed as if you had directly opened the part document.
Name of edited part End in place editing
Assembly parts
Assembly Neighborhoods
If working in bottom-up mode (not creating in place parts), you may still want to modify a part
"A" contingent on the relative position of another part "B" in an associative assembly "C".
In other words, if part "B" changes, or if the relative position of "B" compared to "A" in "C"
changes, it is desirable that "A" automatically updates to reflect any modification without
having to make manual modifications on "A".
The obvious advantage is to save time, as well as to eliminate the risk of errors occurring.
TopSolid offers this through the concept of an assembly neighborhood.
To create in part "A", the image of part "B" in its relative position, open the assembly, select
part "A", run the "Assembly Neighborhood..." popup command (in the "Other" submenu),
select part "B" and run the validation.
When part "A" is edited, part "B" turns transparent, and you can associatively make use of this
image.

Note that creating a neighborhood synchronizes the part receiving the neighborhood with the
assembly, therefore you must avoid creating neighborhoods unless absolutely necessary in
order to reduce the overall complexity of the operation.
Assembly neighborhood
Assembly Contexts
Using assembly neighborhoods synchronizes the part with the assembly, which has the
advantage of ensuring modifications are added from one to the other instantaneously, and vice
versa.
However, this can be a disadvantage when several people want to work on the same
assembly.
Once the first modification is made, the assembly and all parts containing a neighborhood are
locked so that only the user who initiates it can use it, and no one else can then work on those
parts.
To allow several people to collaboratively work on the same the same assembly, you can
create an assembly context instead of an assembly neighborhood, the same way as the
neighborhood, but by using the "Assembly Context..." command instead of the "Assembly
Neighborhood..." command.
The assembly context does not synchronize the part with the assembly, and therefore the part
can be worked on without locking the assembly.
However, it is not updated automatically, so it will have to be done manually, as explained in
the online help.
Modifying Parts From Within the Assembly

As seen above, there are different ways to modify a part designed in place or not by
associatively taking into account its environment within the assembly.
This is quite tedious however, especially for a part not designed in place, since the concept of
a neighborhood or assembly context must then be used.
This is why commands to modify parts directly from within the assembly are most frequently
used, especially some of the commands from the "Modeling" menu, such as the "Trim..." and
"Drilling" commands.
These commands can also modify several parts at the same time, allowing to quickly drill a
hole through several parts in relation to an axis defined in the assembly, and to do so

associatively (if the axis is moved, the drilled holes in the parts will also be moved), which
prevents the possibility for error.
Special Parts
When using a part once or more in different assemblies, it may be that you have to modify it in
certain cases, but not every case!
You are therefore unable to modify the part directly, because otherwise all the assemblies
would be affected.
This involves making another part (different description, different part number, etc.) that can be
called "special", which is derived from the previous part and also has certain modifications,
and then using it instead of the previous part wherever a modification is required.
This requires several manipulations and also creates problems when, for example, the part is
a repetitively produced occurrence (you would have to exclude it and then include the
modified part in the right place).
To simplify this manipulation, you can use a command to derive and replace the part in the
right place all at the same time.
Simply select the part to be modified in the assembly and use the "Others > Derive part for
modification..." contextual command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
Special part
Local Parts
The above method is preferred in all applicable cases, but at least one case in which it is not
suitable is when there is a variable number of special parts.
This scenario could happen, for example, when you want to modify all instances of a
repetition, and associatively change the number of instances.

In this case, you cannot create a part document for each different part (a document cannot be
created or deleted during a simple update when the value of a parameter changes). You must
then make use of a new concept: a "local part".
A local part of an assembly is a part that is defined locally in the assembly document, and not
in an independent part document.
A local part cannot be reused in another assembly, unlike a part designed in place, and its only
use is in its assembly definition.
The "Modeling > Local Parts..." command allows you to you convert the result of a parts
repetition into local parts, so you should start with this command if you want to modify all
instances of a repetition.
It will then be possible to use, for example, the "Trim by Profile..." command to trim all local
parts resulting from the repetition.
Local parts
Representations
As with parts, an assembly has representations.
A detailed representation consists of the exact definition of the assembly, and is used in
particular to calculate its density (if needed). All parts included or created in place are
automatically added.
The design representation is what you should use to work on the assembly, and is quite
often the same thing as the detailed representation.
You can also create a simplified representation by using the "Tools > Representations >
Simplified Representation" command.
In addition to the representations mentioned here, you can create your own representations
using the general "Tools > Representations > Representation…" command.
The theory behind how assembly representations operate is similar to how part
representations operate: part and sub-assembly shortcuts point to content in the
representation.

There is, however, another option: you may want to include a part in a representation but view
it in one of its non-detailed representations.
This is possible because each shortcut can point to the desired representation, and you can
change the representation using the "Change Representation..." command in the context
menu.
Note that the detailed representation of the assembly can only contain parts and sub-
assemblies represented in detail to ensure that it is always exactly representing the final
product.
Use part, but in

simplified representation
Part 3 has not been used

in the simplified representation
Material and Coating

Normally, to modify a part's material or coating, you need to edit it as described in the "Parts"
chapter.
There is however a shortcut that will let you modify it directly from within the assembly.
You must first find the document for the desired material or coating (either by searching for it or
by taking it directly from a library), or else create a new type of material (see below).
Next, "drag and drop" from the search result or document library tree onto the part occurrence
in the assembly.
The result is identical to a direct modification of the part: the part is now modified.
Physical Properties
You can define certain physical properties for an assembly in order to use them in certain
circumstances, such as: bill of materials, analysis, dynamic simulation, etc.
The physical properties available are the same as for parts, specifically: surface, volume,
density, center of mass and moments of inertia.
In contrast to parts, there is no manual mode, therefore these properties are either not
managed or managed automatically via the "Tools > Physical Properties…" command.
For an assembly however, some details must be added.
The assembly's center of mass is dependant on the position of the parts. This information, in
addition to information pertaining to inertia, is therefore not specific to the document as it is for
the parts, but specific to each configuration (see below).

Collisions
An assembly can be analyzed to find out if certain parts are in collision, using the "Tools >
Collisions..." command.
This command lets you activate the collision detection, which is calculated in the analysis
stage, but only runs when the document is current or saved.
When collisions occur, they can be explored in the new "Collisions" folder in the entities tree.
Note that you should not be interested in finding out whether the parts inside the same sub-
assembly are in collision with each other, which is part of the sub-assembly collision analysis,
but rather whether sub-assemblies or top level parts are in collision with each other.
Background Documents
When several people are needed to work on a large project, it is difficult to efficiently share
work.
TopSolid provides a way to make this easier through the use of background documents.
You can add a document as a background of the current document by using the "TopSolid >
File > Background Document..." command.
Once added, the background document and current document are superimposed, and a
"Backgrounds" folder appears in the entities tree, which lists all background documents for
the current document (there can be many). You can set the background document as visible or
invisible from the "Show" and "Hide" commands in the context menu.
The project manager can then develop, in a separate document (pure 3D modeling for
example), the main definition elements for the product to make, such as: point characteristics,
axes, planes, etc.
Each developer responsible for a part can then place this document as a background for the
part of the assembly he/she is working on: he/she will be able to associatively make use of the
construction elements from the background document.
Next, build the final assembly by reassembling the partial assemblies (since these were
produced in their operating position, each inclusion should be made on "origin").
When a change is made in the shared document (e.g. increasing the center-to-center
distance), the assemblies will update when the final assembly is loaded.
Local Shapes
In certain rare cases, you may need to produce shapes directly in the assembly (instead of
creating them in a part and including them). These are called local shapes, and can be
created using the commands featured in the "Modeling > Local Shapes" menu.
These are the same commands that allow you to make shapes in parts. Once created, the
shapes are also listed under the assembly's "Shapes" folder.
One possible use for local shapes is for making a shape to define the simplified representation
of the assembly.
Unless there is a good reason to create local shapes, avoid doing so because they have no
physical reality, and in particular, have no material, density or description.
Since they aren't parts, they are used for "special" purposes only.

Local Modifications
There are several different ways to modify the parts of an assembly:
• The easiest is to open the part definition document and modify it!
• You can also edit the in place part in the assembly, and then proceed working as previously
described.
• You can also perform operations that indirectly modify the parts (see instructions below for
miter trim.)
In all of these cases, the part is modified, and every assembly using this part views the same
part.
You will also notice in the part definition document that all modifications have been made
(even those made without opening the part document) affecting the part's shape, density, etc.
However, it is possible for a part used in different products to undergo operations during
assembly that are specific to each product, therefore the manufactured and delivered part
definition will be different than the final part once assembled.
This type of modification is called a local modification of the assembly.
For example, if you are assembling kitchen cabinets or other built-in furniture, you may need
to drill a panel in a certain location. The manufactured and delivered panel in every "kit" will be
unique and undrilled (in that particular location).
To manage this type of situation in TopSolid, there are two options available.
• Ignore local modifications. This is often easier, since the benefits you gain from creating
them most likely don't outweigh the effort required to produce them.
• Create local modifications by modifying a part shape locally.
If you want to modify a part shape locally in the assembly (a part can have multiple shapes,
see the "Parts" chapter), use the "Modeling > Local Shapes > Make Locally Modifiable..."
command and select the shape to modify.
You will then be able to use the commands for creating modification operations on this shape
from the "Modeling > Local Shapes" menu.
Operations will only be executed in the assembly document, and you will see that the
definition in the part document will not be modified.
Warning: Local modifications are not accounted for in calculating the physical properties of
the assembly (e.g. density), as they should have no significant impact. Otherwise, it is up to
you to take this calculation into consideration and draw your own conclusions.
In Place Assemblies
When you have created several in place parts in an assembly, you may sometimes want to
group them in a sub-assembly because, for example, it corresponds to a product you will have
to identify in the BOM (description, reference, etc.).
In cases like this, you can create an in place assembly, using the "Modeling > In Place
Assembly..." command, for which you can find instructions in the online help.
The in place assembly can also contain parts that were not designed in place.
As is the case for in place parts, an in place assembly is stored inside the assembly document
it is defined in as a folder in the project tree, and is synchronized with it.
An in place assembly cannot be a mechanism (see the "Mechanism" chapter).
Generally, it is better to create assemblies in place once modeling is completed.

Local Assemblies
You can also define a subassembly within an assembly without creating a corresponding
assembly document, unlike in the preceding method. This is called a local assembly.
This is done by using the "Modeling > Local Assembly..." command, for which the online help
provides instructions.
It is preferable and more efficient to use local assembly rather than in place assembly when it
does not have to be included in other assemblies.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Mechanisms
Mechanisms

Mechanisms TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
Assemblies can be either rigid or articulated. If they are articulated, they are then called
"mechanisms".
Mechanisms (e.g. cylinder, ball bearing, etc.) have internal degrees of freedom that allow
them to be included in a higher level assembly in order to satisfy defined positioning
constraints.
This way, it will be possible to utilize the rod in the casing of the jack to fit it in the assembly
that uses it.
There are several methods available for modeling an assembly, as described in the previous
chapter: reassembling by positioning constraints, designing in place, etc.
Regardless of the method used, we ultimately get a rigid assembly, which can then (if
necessary) be easily transformed into a mechanism by defining its kinematics.
This also applies for an assembly achieved by importing a neutral STEP type format or similar,
which only contains the information enabling the parts to be positioned correctly, but not which
defines if they are mobile or not, and if the case, how.
This ability represents a major advantage over other products that offer only the concept of a
positioning constraint and therefore do not allow for a part that was originally designed to be
fixed to then become movable.
Additionally, even when a part is included and positioned, the positioning constraints are
sometimes unrelated to how they must be able to move when the mechanism is in use. You
may want to position a block in the center of the face of another part during the design and
then want to move it in a given direction during operation.
Mechanisms
Most of the commands to be used to define and manipulate a mechanism are located in the
"Mechanism" menu.
The first thing to do is to transform the rigid assembly into a mechanism using the first
command in the "Mechanism > Mechanism..." menu. This command is like a mode in that
when you activate it by clicking on it, the assembly is transformed into a mechanism, and if it is
deactivated by clicking on it again, the mechanism is transformed into a rigid assembly (which
can cause information about the definition of the mechanism to be lost, which is why a
confirmation is requested).
Once the assembly has been transformed into a mechanism, the other commands in the
"Mechanisms" menu become accessible, and may be used to define the mechanism.
In addition, a new folder called "Mechanism" appears in the entities tree, which contains all
relevant information about the composition of the mechanism being defined.
A new dedicated stage has also been created: the mechanism stage. This stage follows the
modeling stage, which ensures the mechanism is defined by a real assembly, i.e. once the
assembly parts have been defined and finalized.
Rigid Groups
Interdependent parts then need to be grouped into rigid groups.
The parts within a single rigid group do not move in relation to one another: Their relative
positions remain constant while the mechanism is in use. The "rigid group" concept is
sometimes called "equivalence class" in mechanics manuals.
For example, the various parts of a screw assembly must belong to a single rigid group.
Rigid groups are entities that are stored in the "Groups" folder within the "Mechanism" folder
of the entity tree.

TopSolid automatically creates a rigid group that cannot be deleted and that will always be
fixed while the mechanism is in use. This is called the ground group.
During assembly modeling, the different parts are automatically stored in this rigid group
(which is initially empty), as can be seen by examining its contents.
To define a genuinely articulated mechanism, create other rigid groups and store the
corresponding parts there, which is done using the "Mechanism > Rigid group…" command.
For example, if you are creating a bolt with a washer on each side, you can leave the screw
and a washer in the built group and make a new rigid group for the nut and the other washer.
When completing the assembly modeling after having defined the mechanism, it may be
useful to tell TopSolid to store the new parts directly in a rigid group outside of the ground
group.
This is done by making another current rigid group by using the contextual command "Make
current", which is available when a rigid group is selected in the entity tree (the rigid group is
grayed) or by selecting it in the dropdown list in the menu bar.
It is also possible to combine two rigid groups into one by using the "Mechanism > Merge
Rigid Groups…" command.
A rigid group can also contain simple entities including frames or sketches, in order to make
kinematic simulations in particular (see later).
Joints
Once the rigid groups are defined, you must specify how the mechanism is articulated, which
is done by defining the joints.
Joints are entities that are stored in the "Joints" folder within the "Mechanism" folder of the
entity tree. They are represented by a small graphic symbol.
There are several types of joints available, and joints can be created using various menu
commands.

Generally, to define a joint, you must specify the groups between which it must be applied (a
joint is usually applied between two rigid groups) and its characteristic elements: axis of
rotation, direction of translation, etc.
There are several categories of joints:
• Simple traditional joints for defining most common mechanisms: prismatic joint, revolute
joint, cylindrical joint, spherical joint, planar joint, point on axis joint, axis on plane joint.
• Simple unilateral joints (generally providing permanent or non-permanent contact,
restricted only on one side): point on plane, point on shape, sphere on plane, sphere on
sphere, sphere on shape.
• Complex joints: screw joint, rack and pinion joint, gear joint, slot and pin joint, point on
profile, profile on plane.
• A rigid joint for making two rigid groups interdependent without combining them.
For example, if we have a bolt, we can create a prismatic joint between the two rigid groups to
tighten the parts when sliding on the nut.
A joint can be deactivated using the "Deactivate" contextual command that is available when
a joint is selected in the entity tree (an inactive joint displays within parentheses in the tree). It
can be re-activated later using the "Activate" command.
Overconstraint
When a mechanism's joints are defined, it is best to avoid creating redundant joints, like
putting several aligned revolute joints between the same two rigid groups.
More specifically, it is advisable to avoid making mechanisms that are "overconstrained", to
use the exact term whose more detailed description can be found in mechanics manuals.

TopSolid supports overconstrained mechanisms, but this leads to worsened performance and
possibly to resolution problems (for example, if bearings are not exactly aligned).
In addition, the calculation of efforts will not yield realistic results if the mechanism is not
"isostatic" (see the "Simulations" chapter).
It is possible to find out if the mechanism is overconstrained by selecting the "Mechanism"
folder in the entities tree and by using the "Others > Analyze..." contextual command.
If the mechanism is overconstrained, the problematic joints will be listed, and some will need
to be deleted or transformed to make the mechanism isostatic.
For example, when you make a parallelogram mechanism with four bars linked by revolutes,
one of the revolutes needs to be replaced by a point on axis joint to make the mechanism
isostatic.
Positioning Conversion
Generally, the way in which an assembly is modeled has nothing to do with how it will move,
so the mechanism's kinematics must be defined, as explained earlier.
In this particular case in which parts constrained in a single grouped positioning are re-
assembled and can therefore be moved with the mouse, you can save time by using the
"Mechanism > Convert Positioning" command, which can sometimes produce the
corresponding kinematics.
This command (along with its limits of application) is described in the online help.
Configurations
Once the rigid groups and joints have been defined, we have a mechanism in proper and due
form, and when the assembly is included in a higher level assembly, it will be possible to use
its articulations when positioning it in relation to the other parts of the assembly.
However, it can also be useful to visualize certain key positions of the mechanism locally,
without having to include it in another assembly.
This is done using the configuration concept.
The mechanism's configuration is a position that is compatible with the constraints of its joints.
It is an entity stored in the "Configurations" folder in the "Mechanism" folder in the entity tree.
TopSolid automatically creates a configuration that cannot be deleted or modified,
corresponding to the position of the parts at the end of the modeling stage. This is the design
configuration.
One of the different existing configurations is called the current configuration, its name
displayed in the corresponding drop down list of the menu, and it can be changed by selecting
another configuration.
While in the mechanism stage, you see the parts in their positions that correspond to the
current configuration.

Constrained Configurations
It is possible to create other configurations, such as configurations defined by positioning
constraints, using the "Mechanism > Constrained Configuration" command.
This method works as if the mechanism were included in a higher level assembly without
having to create such an assembly.
Rigid groups are moved by taking into account the joint constraints in order to satisfy the
positioning constraints that can be created using the commands in the "Mechanism" menu
(similarly to the positioning constraint used when modeling an assembly for re-assembly).
Once created, the constrained configuration is edited according to the same principle as for
positioning.
It is then possible to add constraints using the general "Mechanism > Constraint..." command
or the other constraint creation commands in the "Mechanism" menu.
Once the constraints have been created, simply finish editing the constrained configuration.
If you want to modify it later, you can edit it by selecting it from the entity tree and using the
"Edit..." contextual command (for the operation).
It is also possible to edit the constrained configuration by "right-clicking" it, if it is current.
Nonholonomic Mechanisms
During a modification, the constrained configuration is generally recalculated from the last
known position. The advantage of this is that it is faster, but it does not produce the correct
result when the mechanism has nonholonomic joints, such as a ball bearing on a plane.
When the diameter of the ball changes, its position must be re-established by the design
configuration in order to have the right number of turns, which is important if the ball's rigid
group is connected to the mechanism's other parts.
Likewise, for a non-permanent contact, if the diameter of the ball changes from its original
position, it can have consequences that can be determined only through an actual simulation.

This may be anecdotal, but this corresponds to the general concept of a mechanism's
admissible configurations. Changing the diameter of a pinion completely changes an
engine's admissible configurations, provided that the timing belt does not fail!
To force the configuration calculation from the initial state, you must disable the "Incremental
Solving" contextual command.
Inclusions
When a mechanism is included in a higher-level assembly, there are two possibilities offered
in the "Assembly > Include Part or Assembly..." command dialog:
• Rigid inclusion enabled: The subassembly is considered to be rigid in the assembly in
which is it included. It is in a position defined by one of its configurations, selected at the
time of inclusion. (This can be changed later.)
• Rigid inclusion disabled: The subassembly is considered to be articulated in the assembly
in which is it included. It will be possible to change its degrees of freedom to adjust its
position in the assembly (such as to tighten the bolt to fix together two given parts).
It is possible to make a rigid subassembly articulated using the "Articulate" contextual
command or to make an articulated subassembly rigid using the "Make Rigid" contextual
command.
When a mechanism is included by "drag-and-drop", it is automatically included in articulated
mode.
Inheritance
When a subassembly is included in articulated mode, you can adjust its internal kinematics to
position it, but the resulting assembly might not have degrees of freedom.
Typically, once the bolt is in place, the final assembly does not have degrees of freedom, and
it is therefore not a mechanism. It is a single rigid group (the ground group) with no joints.
Sometimes, the final assembly retains the subassembly's degrees of freedom. It is said to
"inherit" them.
Typically, if several aligned ball bearings are included, you get a mechanism for rotating a rotor
around a stator.
We would then want to place the outer bearing rings in the stator's rigid group and the inner
bearing rings in the rotor's rigid group.
This is done partly by inheriting the rigid groups of the bearing (check the "Inherit Rigid
Groups" box when including it), which produces two rigid groups per bearing and merges them
with the stator and rotor's rigid groups.
Then, a revolute joint should be defined, which can be done directly or by inheriting a
connection from one of the bearings, according to the same principle as for the rigid groups.
It is not advisable to inherit joints from all of the bearings, which would lead to several
redundant revolute joints and poor quality kinematics (highly overconstrained).


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Simulations
Simulations

Simulations TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
The goal of modeling a mechanism is to be able to run simulations on the virtual model
before moving on to making actual (costly) prototypes.
Most of the commands to be used to define and run simulations are located in the "Simulation"
menu.
Based on the results of the simulations, you can modify the design and re-run the simulations
until you have achieved satisfactory results. Because the simulations are defined in
association with one another, each cycle of this iterative process will be minimized, thereby
gaining significant productivity.
There are two available simulation types:
• Kinematics simulations are used for studying the movement of the mechanism's parts as
it is operated.
• Dynamics simulations are used to determine movement based on the causes that
produce it, and they are helpful for sizing parts (resistance) and engines (power).
Dynamics simulations require the physical properties of the parts (mass, centers of mass and
inertia). They are more complex than kinematics simulations to perform, and should therefore
be reserved for a more advanced level of analysis.
This chapter presents an overview of the functionalities available for performing both types of
simulations.
Warning: The results of simulations may be indicative of or affected by errors (ex. because its
approximations cause it to fall outside the scope of validity). When working with critical
mechanisms, you must always verify them with another software. (If both give the same result,
it is probably accurate.) In addition, even if the result is correct, it is possible that
simplifications made when you modeled the mechanism are not verified in reality (friction,
tolerance, etc.). You should always test the final product in real (or even extreme) situations
before making it available to the user risk-free.
Tasks
To perform a kinematics simulation, you must force some parts to move that are driven by
engines in reality. Based on joints defined in the mechanism, it will move fully and can then be
studied.
This is done using entities called tasks, which are stored in the "Tasks" folder in the
"Mechanism" folder in the entity tree.
A task describes a basic action that will be imposed on the mechanism during a simulation.
There are several types of tasks available, but the most commonly used task is the joints
driving task, which allows you to adjust the degree of freedom for some simple joints. It can
be created using the "Simulation > Joints Driving Task...", whose use is detailed in the online
help.
Typically, driven joints are those that will be motorized (motor driven) in reality, which includes
only some types of joints:
• Prismatic joint: For a linear engine.
• Cylindrical Joint: For a cylinder (for driving the translation, the rotation remaining free).
• Revolute joint: For a rotary engine.
• Point on profile joint: To force the position of a point along a profile (rather special case).
A non-motorized joint is said to be passive.
A single task can control several joints at once.
For example, the "Open" task for opening a two-door cabinet will control the left-door joint and
right-door joint.

The column that corresponds to each joint contains the relative driving articular coordinate in
relation to its task start value. As such, if the "right gate rotation" is "20°", it will be "120°" after
executing the "Open" task and "220°" if this task is executed twice in a row.
Note that, during a simulation, a joint is either motorized the entire time or passive the entire
time. If it is controlled by a task at some point during the simulation, it will be considered to be
motorized, and TopSolid will keep its degree of liberty constant before and after the task
controlling it.
It is impossible to open the cabinet door by pulling on the handle if its joint is controlled by an
engine, even when the engine is not running!
When a joint is driven into position (the most common scenario), the state of the joint is given
at certain times. TopSolid can then find intermediate states automatically, which is called
interpolation.
There are several interpolation methods, with constant velocity being the most simple. This
method is available, but not recommended, because it leads to instant changes in velocity
(and thus infinite acceleration) at key points, which does not match reality. Specifically,
dynamic simulations cannot be performed, as they would be considered invalid in this case.
Generally, it is preferable to use other types of interpolation.
Scenarios
During a simulation, you can execute one or more tasks, which can be organized as a
scenario.
Scenarios are entities that are stored in the "Scenarios" folder within the "Mechanism" folder
of the entity tree.
A scenario is made up of a series of tasks that are run at certain times. To create one, use the
"Simulation > Scenario..." command, which also allows you to define it using the scenario
editor.
For each task, define when it should start within the scenario, which begins at instant "0".
For example, you can make a "Close" task to do the opposite of the "Open" task and then
make an "Open and close" scenario that chains together the two tasks, with a short pause
between them.
Certain tasks may run in parallel, which is why the scenario may have several tracks.
The scenario editor instructions are described in the online help.

It is also possible to add tasks to the scenario by "dragging and dropping" into the entities tree.
Scenario lasting 17s
Task starting at t = 10s

Task starting at t = 0s
Task "Close" lasting 7s

Task "Open" lasting 7s
Kinematics
Once a scenario has been defined, you can then create a kinematics simulation, using the
"Simulation > Kinematics simulation..." command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
You can generally just choose the scenario and click OK.
The newly created simulation is then accessible in the "Simulations" folder in the
"Mechanism" folder in the entity tree.
Once the simulation has been created, you should see it work by viewing its movement using
the "Simulation > Play simulation..." command.
If the scenario is lengthy, it may take a long time to computer, and you may not want to
recompute it with each modification to the mechanism. To avoid this, it is useful to chose the
manual update mode for long simulations, as explained in the "Operations" chapter.
When playing a simulation that needs to be updated, the "Refresh" button is enabled so that
you can update the simulation. If it is not updated, you will see the result of the simulation
computed before the latest modifications to the mechanisms were made, which might not be
accurate.

Wireframe Kinematics
To quickly make a kinematics pre-study, it is possible to avoid modeling the parts and to just
make a wireframe representation of the bodies in motion.
To do so, simply make an assembly and define rigid groups using simple entities like frames,
sketches, etc.
Then simply follow the same procedure as for a normal kinematics simulation.
Forces
Until now, we have seen how to create kinematics simulations to study the mechanism's
movement during operation.
To create dynamics simulations, you can create other entity types in order to give TopSolid a
better understanding of the modeled mechanism, beyond the purely kinematics information
already provided.
Specifically, you can create forces entities using the "Simulation" menu commands. The
created entities will be stored in the "Forces" folder in the "Mechanism" folder in the entity
tree.
A force can be deactivated using the "Deactivate" contextual command that is available when
a force is selected in the entity tree (an inactive joint displays within parentheses in the tree). It
can be re-activated later using the "Activate" command.
If you want to require a variable force, create a point or couple force, and control it using a
force control task.
Starting Velocities
When performing a dynamics simulation, it is important to properly set the mechanism's
starting conditions.
The starting conditions for parts is defined by a starting configuration that must be chosen. The
starting velocity is assumed to be zero.
If some joints are controlled using constant velocity interpolation (not recommended), this can
force some parts to have a non-zero starting velocity.
You may also want to perform a simulation by setting the starting velocity for a rigid group,
such as to represent the addition of a part coming from another machine.
To do this, create a velocity entity using the "Simulation" menu commands. The created
entities will be stored in the "Velocities - Mechanism" folder in the entity tree.
When you define a dynamics simulation, you can choose a velocity as a starting velocity for a
rigid group (which should then be compatible with its degrees of freedom).
Simulation
Once the mechanism kinematics have been defined and any forces and starting velocities
have been created, you can perform dynamic simulations.
Before doing that, verify that the necessary physical properties have been calculated.
Specifically, each part should have a mass, a center of mass, and moments of inertia. The
same is true for each subassembly and the assembly where the simulation will be done (see
the "Physical Properties" section in the "Parts" and "Assemblies" chapters).
You can then create a dynamics simulation using the "Simulation > Dynamics Simulation..."
command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
You can play this simulation the same way you play a kinematics simulation.

When the mechanism is overconstrained, the dynamics simulation generally does not usually
give very good results, especially for joints, which is why it will refuse to do it by default, and
the operation will become invalid!
However, it is possible to remove this security by checking the "Overconstrained" box, but
there is no guarantee that the results will be reliable.
Collisions
When you create a simulation (kinematics or dynamics), it is possible to detect collisions
between certain rigid groups by using the "Collisions" option in the simulation commands.
If you check the "Invalid if collision" box, the simulation operation will be invalid if a collision is
detected during its update.
This mode is particularly advantageous when the design of a machine is practically finished. It
is useful when the document automatically becomes invalid during automatic propagation by
updating a part modification causing a collision. Indeed, it is uncertain whether we have time to
go and check the result of each simulation when we have to make a last-minute modification
and it still has to be delivered on time.
On the other hand, it is better not to activate this mode in the design phase, but rather to go
and check possible collisions and correct failures.
Collisions will be shown when the simulation is played, with the option of either stopping at the
first collision, or to see them all, and will identify the parts in collision.
Note that you should not be interested in finding out whether the parts from the same rigid
group are in collision with each other, which is part of the assembly collision analysis itself, as
indicated in the "Assemblies" chapter.
Videos
If you want to send the result of a simulation to a third party, you can record a video using the
"Simulation > Record Simulation..." command.
A certain number of settings are available, as explained in the online help.
Particular care should be taken when selecting the "Codec" option, which needs to be
available during playback.
Configurations
If you want to "immortalize" the state of the mechanism at a specific point in time within a
simulation so you can draft it, for example, you can create a configuration that corresponds
to this position.
This is done using the "Simulation > Simulation configuration..." command.
Measurements
After performing a simulation and finding that the obtained result is what you want, you may
sometimes want to have more detailed information, not only qualitative, but also quantitative
information.
To do this, you can make accurate measurements against the simulated virtual model by
creating measurement entities using the "Simulation > Measurements" menu commands.
The created entities will be stored in the "Measurements - Mechanism" folder in the entity
tree.
Some measurements can be taken on all simulation types, such as the measurement of the
distance between one rigid group and another.

Others can be done only on dynamics simulations, such as the measurement of load on a rigid
group for a given joint.
Once the measurements have been created, drag and drop them over to the simulations
where the measurements need to be made and view the result with the "Simulation > View
Measurements..." command. (It is also possible to export the measurements in ".csv" format,
which can be imported into most spreadsheets, using the "Simulation > Export
Measurements..." command.)
For example, in the lever simulation described below, you can measure the load on the lower-
left joint.
Point on Axis Joint

to avoid overconstraint
Sliding part
Revolute to analyze
This then produces the following results:
Because the maximum load is 52N, you must therefore size the parts to support that.

Trajectories
To complete the analysis, you can generate trajectories for some points in some mobile rigid
groups using the "Simulation > Trajectory..." command.
Trajectory
Origin
Moving group
The trajectory can either be associative, and therefore recalculated when the mechanism
changes, or create an editable sketch in the modeling stage, which may be used to model a
cam, for example.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Families
Families

Families TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
Sometimes, you find yourself needing to create several similar parts differing only in the value
of certain dimensions.
Of course, it is possible to create them separately, but this method has several drawbacks:
• Even though you are able to copy the parts, it takes time.
• If all of the parts need to be modified, you have to do this manually for each one.
TopSolid offers the other option for creating a family of parts.
This chapter explains how you do this.
Generics
Creating a family of parts starts by creating what is called a "generic" part, which is modeled
using one or several parameters.
For example, to make a set of spacers, you need to model a "Spacer" part using three
parameters:
• "id": Inner diameter.
• "od": Outer diameter.
• "h": Height.
This part will not have an actual reality, it will only be used to produce different sizes of spacers
by replacing the parameter values and updating the document.
In order to let TopSolid know that this part is not real and to especially not include it when
performing a search for parts based on certain criteria (see below), you must declare it as
being virtual.
This is done using the "TopSolid > File > Virtual Document..." command, which is generally
used to declare any document as being virtual.
Definitions
Once a generic part is created, you can create a family document by going to the "Advanced"
tab in the document creation menu.
You must then let TopSolid know that the part you've just made is the generic part for the
family by "dragging and dropping" the part document from the project tree into the open family

document window. You can also use the "TopSolid > File > Generic Document...") command
from the menu.
Both documents (generic and family) together form a whole and establish the family
definition, which in this case is a family of parts, since the generic document is a part
document.
It is often good practice to name the generic and family documents the same to ensure they
will be listed one after the other in the project tree.
You can also share the same generic with multiple families, in which case another naming
convention should of course be used to be able to find them...
Catalogs
Next, complete the family catalog, which contains a description of each of its components,
called "instances".
Each row in the catalog corresponds to an instance, identified by a "code", which is a piece of
plain text that must be unique and placed in the "Code" column (two different rows in the
catalog cannot have the same code).
First, declare the parameters that will vary for the generic document. This is done by doing a
"drag and drop" from the "Generics" folder in the entities tree into the catalog. This folder
contains the list of parameters that can vary in the generic document.
For every new generic parameter added, a new column will be inserted in the catalog.
In the spacer example, you should use the parameters "id", "od" and "h".

Instances
After the catalog is completed, the family is fully defined.
You can visually confirm that each instance correctly corresponds to what you want it to by
selecting a row in the catalog and using the "View Instance" command from the context menu.
Family instances create independent documents that are accessible inside the family
document in the project tree, identified by their code.
Family
Instances
Inclusions
The instances of family parts are parts that are "almost" like others (you can't edit them directly
since they're generated by the family), therefore you can include them in the assembly just like
a normal part.

However, a new option is now available in which you can change the instance by selecting the
part in the assembly and using the "Code..." command from the context menu.
Conditions
In certain part families, you may not want a given operation to be executed on certain
instances.
For example, a chamfer that isn't useful in small dimensions, or a drilling that is only optional.
You will then want to use the conditional activation feature for the relevant operations in the
generic part, as shown in the "Operations" chapter, and assign it a Boolean parameter to be
catalogued.
Drivers
On occasion, some of the generic's parameters must be able to vary on an ongoing basis and
not assume some of the discrete values catalogued.
For example, the spacers could be any height if they are custom cut to a given cross-section
tube and not supplied with fixed values.
This is possible through the use of "drivers".
When you want a parameter to vary on an ongoing basis, select it from the generics folder and
"drag and drop" it into the drivers folder instead of into the catalog, thereby creating the driver
that corresponds to the parameter.
Next, select and use the "Edit..." popup command to give it a description, which will help
identify it when using the family.
Typically, the "h" driver can have "Height" as its description.
Driven parameter
Catalogued parameters
You can access the instances of the family inside the family document in the project tree like
before.

However, these instances correspond to values from the catalog and do not represent real
parts, since the driver has yet to be defined, and therefore are referred to as generic
instances.
When you include this type of instance from a part family in an assembly, TopSolid will ask you
to enter the driver values, which will then create a real instance.
Geometric Drivers
Most drivers will be for parameters, but you can also define point, axis, plane or frame
geometric drivers.
To do this, follow the procedure as explained above, but by leveraging the "Geometric
generics" folder in the entities tree.
During inclusion, TopSolid will ask you to select the geometric entities corresponding to the
drivers, and will construct the instance of the resulting family and store it in the project tree
inside the assembly document (a somewhat unusual location), which is considered a folder
used for this particular purpose.
When a family contains geometric drivers, a new instance is produced during each inclusion,
and will be modified if the entities feeding the drivers are modified.
This differs to what happens if there is no geometric driver, in which inclusions with the same
set of values for the drivers share a unique centralized instance on the family level, which
saves memory and improves performance.
Parameterized Text
When creating a part family, it is advisable to make sure the document names for the
instances are different from one another.
This will help you identify part occurrences in the assembly, and to know, for example, if you
included a 5" or 7" spacer.
To do this, make sure the name for the generic part is no longer fixed but instead variable, and
is processed based on the value of certain parameters such as code.
Replace the text parameter for the document name in the generic part's entities tree with
parameterized text, such as code.
This is done by selecting the "Name" parameter in the parameters folder of the generic part
and using the "Parameterized..." command from the context menu, which allows you to enter
text containing variable fields between square brackets ("[" and "]").
You can use code as a variable by entering "$CODE", or else another parameter by entering
its name.
Typically, if you want each instance for the spacer family to be called "Spacer <code>", the
parameterized text should be: "Spacer [$CODE]".
To verify that the name processes correctly, it is helpful to define a code for the generic part by
using the value "?" so that the name for the generic spacer part is "Spacer ?", which also
clearly indicates that it is not a true part.

When drivers are used, you should also include them in the parameterization. So in the tube
spacers example, you could use the name: "Spacer [$CODE] x [h]" to have a name similar to
the one used for the spacers without drivers.
You must do the same thing for the description to ensure the BOMs are accurate.
Sub-families
When you create a family of assemblies, it may be necessary to use different components
based on instances.
For example, if we make a "bolt" assembly, made up of a screw and a nut, we may want to
vary the following elements:
• The type of screw (i.e. the screw family used).
• The code of the screw (i.e. "M6 x 20").
• The type of nut.
• The code of the nut.
You can make these choices two different ways:
• Either for each family code, i.e. you specify that the "B1" bolt code uses a "T1" screw type
and "C1" code.
• Or with a driver, i.e. the user of the bolt will be the one to choose during inclusion.
To make this type of assembly family, you first need to create special kinds of parameter:
family and code parameters.
The family parameter will allow you to include components whose family will be determined
by the value of a parameter. This can be created using the "Tools > Parameters > Parameter
family..." command.

For example, for a screw, you can create a "sf" parameter corresponding to the screw family
(the family must be opened to be proposed in the list, or referenced by an open document). It
is then possible to edit the inclusion of the screw and, at the family level, choose the
parameter that will be proposed. Once this has been done, any modification of the parameter
will lead to the family of the included screw being changed.
The code parameter will allow you to include components whose code will be determined by
the value of a parameter. This can be created using the "Tools > Parameters > Parameter
code..." command.
Before selecting the code value, you need to choose the family in which it is defined. It is also
possible to select a family parameter instead, and in this case, the code will be relative to the
family corresponding to the value of the family parameter (this will be associatively maintained
in case this value is changed).
For example, for a screw, you can create a "sc" parameter corresponding to the screw code. It
is then possible to edit the inclusion of the screw and, at the code level, choose the parameter
that will be proposed. Once this has been done, any modification of the parameter will lead to
the code of the included screw being changed.
Once the variable components are included using family and code parameters, you can create
an assembly family.
In the case of the bolt for example, you can imagine putting the screw family parameter in a
driver (its value will be requested during the inclusion), and the remainder in a catalogue (the
choice of the bolt code will determine the other variations).
You can therefore have the following catalog:
When you include a bolt from this family by selecting "ISO 4014 hexagon head screw" as the
screw family (driver), and "B8-50" code, you will then have a sub-assembly made up of:
• A "ISO 4014 hexagon head screw - M8 x 50".
• A "ISO 4032 hexagon nut (style 1) - M8".
Derived Families
When you want to create several similar families, the easiest approach is to make one and
then make the rest by copying the document from the first one in the project tree. You can then
simply modify them as necessary.
This method results in several independent families, which may be what you want.
However, if the different families have a major part in common that may change over time, this
is not the best method because it requires each modification to be made to each family
individually (time-consuming and error-prone). Instead, you should use derived families.
A very common use of derived families involves making families of components similar to
those provided in the standard libraries, limited to certain codes and given, for those that are
used for example, an internal reference to record in the BOM.

To do this, you first need to open the family you want to derive from, make a new empty family,
then run the "TopSolid > File > Generic Document..." menu command. Then select the open
base family from the list and validate (leaving the "Generic Document" field blank).
When this is done, you can see that the catalog has been filled with all the codes of the base
family. You can discard some of them by unchecking the corresponding boxes in the
"Available" column.
It is possible to redefine certain parameters of the base family by "dragging and dropping" from
the "Sources" folder in the entities tree into the catalog. This folder contains the list of
parameters of the base family's generic document, which can be modified during the
derivation.
For example, if we want to put an internal reference to the instances of the new family, you
need to redefine the "Reference" parameter.
Derived Families with Derived Generics

The previous method has certain limitations, such as the fact that it doesn't allow the material
of the instances to be redefined.
When you want to make more in-depth modifications during the derivation, you also have to
derive the generic document from the base family.
For example, if you want to make a screw family from a given material based on a type of
screw that comes standard, you would:
• Make a part derived from the generic part of the base family.
• Modify its material.
• Make a derived family from the base family as indicated above.
• In the "TopSolid > File > Generic Document..." command, select the derived part as the
derived family generic instead of leaving the field blank.
Explicit Families
In some cases, a generic parameterized model is not easy to make, but some instances are
available, for example downloaded from the Web site of a manufacturer.
It is then possible to make a family without generic, called an explicit family.
To do so, one must create an empty family document, and use the "Tools > Explicit Familiy
Document..." command.
Afterwards, it will be possible to add instances by "drag and drop" from the project tree.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Functions
Functions

Functions TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
When working on a nontrivial assembly, you must manage a certain number or parts and sub-
assemblies.
It often happens that, at any given time when you go to modify a part, when you reload the
final assembly... it doesn't work!
One of the most likely reasons is that when modifying the part, an edge of a shape forming a
fillet (or any geometry by any operation) was deleted, whereas it had been used in an
assembly to define a position, which then became invalid.
In a complex multi-level assembly, finding and fixing this kind of problem can take a lot of time,
and can cause a significant loss in productivity.
One solution consists of "hooking" positioning constraints on geometries more stable than
edges, such as faces, but that only helps the situation slightly.
This chapter introduces more comprehensive and effective solutions, which will also help deal
with the problem of replacing a part with another part that has the same function, without
needing to completely redefine its positioning.
Publishings
The root of the problem in the scenario described in the introduction is the fact that the person
who developed the part did not clearly identify the portions that are functionally stable.
The developer of the assembly therefore made use of the potentially unstable portions of the
part, and the structure collapsed with the slightest breeze...
TopSolid provides a way for the part developer to declare stable portions by creating what's
called publishings, using the "Tools > Publishings" menu commands. Created entities are
stored in the "Publishings" folder in the entity tree.
A publishing is identified by a name and a description.
The publishing name can be short (e.g. "SHF"), but avoid changing it once the publishing is
created (and especially used) because it is used to control the associativity between
documents (during replacement, see below).
The publishing description can be longer (e.g. "Subheading frame"), and can be changed
with little impact (no need to worry if you happen to change your mind), and will be displayed
to help the part user identify what the publication is for.
Take the example of a button that must be placed on a plate to make the front side of a device.
The stable elements are most likely the mounting and side planes for positioning the button in
relation to the borders of the plate. You can also publish a section to be used to make a cut.

Left plane (LPL)
Mounting plane (MPL)
Cutting section (CUT)
Inclusions
When a part or assembly containing publications is included into the top-most level of an
assembly, the publications are visible when editing the position, and it's possible (and even
preferable) to use them to define the constraints.
Incidentally, you can avoid the temptation to "hook" onto unpublished sections by using the
"Assembly > Modes > Filter Unpublished Content" command mode.
After you finish editing the position, the publications for the part become invisible in order to
reduce the amount of content being displayed.

You can however make them visible again by selecting the part and using the "Publishings >
Show Publishings" command in the context menu.
To make the cut in the plate, set the publications for the button as visible, edit the plate
(presumably created in place), and make a pocket using the section published by the button.
You can then significantly modify the shape of the button without causing problems when the
assemblies using the button are updated.
Replacements
Now let's suppose you want to make another button that is round, not square.
You can create similar publishings and use the same names.

In this particular case, you can very easily and very quickly replace the square button with a
round button in the assembly: just select the button and use the "Others > Replace..."
command in the context menu.
You will see that the square button is now round, that its position is still valid, and that even the
cut factored in the modification.
Obviously, if you had had to do this manually, it would have taken a considerable amount of
time. You will find that this feature is very convenient.
Functions
If you need to have several interchangeable parts, you will frequently make use of the
replacement (and publishing) functions.
A small problem is nevertheless worth noting: in order for the replacement function to work
properly, the publications must be identical and be named the same in each document, or an
error will quickly occur...
To overcome this, TopSolid offers the concept of a function.
A function is an identified set of publications for a specific functionality.
For example, in keeping with the previous example, you can define the "Button" function as
being completely defined by a mounting plane, side planes and a cut section.
In addition, every part corresponding to a button should "provide" this function so it can be
used as a button and be considered as a replacement for a button in the assembly.
Definitions
To define a function that can be provided by parts (or rigid assemblies), start by creating a
"Part Function" document by going to the "Advanced" tab in the document creation menu.
Next, create the publications for the function just as you would for a normal part.
When defining a function, you must consider every scenario in which the part providing the
function can be used, and choose the publications accordingly. If publications are missing, the
user of the part will be forced to "hook" onto unpublished sections, with all the problems
previously described.
For example, if you want to be able to position a button using a central frame, you must
anticipate it in the button function as well as the planes.
Of course, there is no need to overdo it, because if a function has too many publications, it will
be painstaking to provide. You will need to find a good compromise.
It is also helpful to model a part that resembles a function-providing part in the definition
document, as it will provide insight into what's inside the document and make it easier to
search.
If this function must be used in different projects, you should place it in a shared project, or
better yet, in a library.
Providing
When you design a part, it is possible to provide it a given function using the "Tools > Provide
Function..." command, which is explained in detail in the online help.
This command creates a new folder, named after its function, under the "Functions" folder
designated for provided functions in the entities tree.
Each publication for the function should be specified when editing the publication.

When orientation publications are edited (e.g. axis, plane), you must be careful and publish it
with the correct orientation. For example, when publishing a plane, if it is published with the
wrong orientation, the position will be reversed when a replacement is made.
Once the function is provided, all of the publishing benefits previously described can be
enjoyed, to a certain degree of confidence, since the risk of an error occurring in the publishing
definition would have been eliminated.
A part can provide several functions.
For example, when designing kitchens, all of the furnishings could provide the "Furnishings"
function to show planes that manage the stacking, and the ventilation hoods could provide the
"Hood" function to show a section that attaches to the air shaft.
It should be noted that when a family of parts is created, and when the generic part provides a
function, all of the instances in the family automatically provide the function as well.
As you will see below (in the "Searches" chapter), you can find all of the parts that provide a
given function, and whose published parameters contain values that meet certain criteria.
Libraries
TopSolid libraries contain definitions of functions provided by components.
For example, the TopSolid mechanical library contains the definition for the "Screw" function,
which is provided by screw components.
You can produce your own type of screw not available in the library, and provide it the
standard "Screw" function.
Your part will then be recognized by TopSolid as a screw, which will allow you to apply it to
anything you can do with a screw, as if it were a standard screw (in particular wizards and
screw processes, see below).
Functions are very convenient for setting up libraries of components made of interchangeable
part families, and it is in your best interest to use them if you need to create your own libraries
for specific components.
Mechanisms
When creating publishings or providing a function in a mechanism, you must specify which
rigid group each published geometric entity belongs to.
By default, they are considered as belonging to the ground group, but if that's not the case,
you must specifically place them into the desired rigid group.
This is done by editing the rigid group and selecting the entity.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Wizards
Wizards

Wizards TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
As seen in the previous chapter, functions allow you to make component libraries that include
interchangeable parts.
We will see in this chapter that they can also provide other services, such as facilitating and
accelerating the positioning and the dimensioning of the component.
Let's take, for example, plug components for plugging tubes.
The "Plug" function they provide will be defined simply by three publications:
• "ID": The plug's inner diameter, which should match the tube's inner diameter.
• "AX": The plug's axis, which should coincide with the tube's axis.
• "PL": The plug's support plane, which should coincide with the tube's end plane.
When making a tube-based assembly and needing to plug one of the tubes, you would
perform the following actions:
• Select the plug type, i.e. the corresponding component family.
• Select the instance that matches the tube's inner diameter.
• Include it in the assembly.
• Place a constraint on the positioning to make the plug coaxial with the tube, which is done
by running the proper command and selecting the axis published by the plug and the tube's
axis.
• Put a constraint on the positioning to place the plug at the bottom of the tube the same way
by using the support plane published by the plug.
As we will see later, selecting the right instance and positioning can be done semi-
automatically, which significantly increases productivity if plugs are frequently used.

Definitions
The automation works by creating a wizard that describes the actions to be carried out when
including the component so that TopSolid can take care of some actions on its own.
To define a wizard, you should start by creating a "Wizard" document by going to the
"Advanced" tab in the document creation command.
A wizard can be used when including a component that provides a given function. For
example, you can create a "Tube plug" wizard that can help us create the scenario described
earlier when including a component with the "Plug" function.
Source
To tell the wizard which function to perform, you need to include the function by dragging and
dropping it from the project tree to the wizard document window and selecting the "Source"
option in the dialog that appears.
You can also use the "Assembly > Define Source..." menu command, using "Function" as the
source type.
Once this is done, it appears as a part in the parts folder, as for an assembly.
Constraints
Next, you should define the positioning of the part as normal, using the function's
publications as a source of constraints.
In this case of a plug, you should put a coaxiality constraint between the axis published by the
plug and an axis (ex. the Z axis) from the assembly. The same is true for the coplanarity
constraint.
Creating these constraints tells the wizard that, when including the component, these
constraints should automatically be created, prompting only for the destinations (the tube's
axis and a plane corresponding to the end of the tube).
Rule Wizard
Constraints
Function
As for the assembly, created constraints are stored in the "Constraints" folder.

Rules
If you also want to automate the dimensioning of the component, you should tell TopSolid
how to select the right instance.
This is done by creating what are called rules, using the "Tools > Rule..." command (whose
use is described in the online help). Created entities are stored in the "Rules" folder in the
entity tree.
Inclusions
If the wizard needs to be used in different projects, place it in a shared project or, better yet, in
a library.
When including a part that provides a function in an assembly, and a wizard is available to
handle that function, it starts up as soon as the inclusion is validated.
If you do not wish to use wizards, disable the "Assembly > Modes > Automatic Wizard" mode.
If several wizards are able to handle the function, they are listed so that you can select which
is the best suited.
For example, when including a screw, you may or may not want to position it, which
corresponds to different wizards.
The wizard first prompts to select the destinations of the constraints, which handles the
positioning of the component.
Then, you can move onto the sizing by checking the "Dimensioning" checkbox on the dialog.
Wizard operation
Plug positioned and dimensioned

in relation to tube
The wizard then prompts to enter the information needed for the rules that have been defined,
which will make it possible to get a good instance.
Note that you are then assembling a wizard operation and that, if the conditions change, the
operation will be able to automatically change the instance.
For example, for the plug, if the diameter of the tube changes, the wizard will automatically
change the plug to have the same inner diameter when it is updated.

Destination
You can automatically enter the destinations of the positioning constraints.
You might have an "Electrical Hookup" wizard, in which the source is defined by a "Male
Electrical Plug" function, and in which the destination is defined by a "Female Electrical Plug"
function. Simply select the female plug when including the male plug so that it is fully
positioned.
To tell the wizard which function to use as the destination, you need to include the function by
"dragging and dropping" it from the project tree to the wizard document window and selecting
the "Destination" option in the dialog that appears.
You can also use the "Assembly > Define Destination..." menu command, using "Function" as
the source type.
Once this is done, it appears as a part in the parts folder, as for an assembly.
Then, use the publishings from this function as the destination for the positioning constraints in
the wizard.
Dedicated Wizards
What we have just seen therefore enables you to make certain manipulations automatic when
using general components that provide a specific function.
You may also want to automatically position a particular part that has no function.
This is possible via dedicated wizards.
To make a wizard dedicated to a particular part, edit the part's definition document and use the
"Tools > Create wizard..." command. Instructions are provided in the online help.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Processes
Processes

Processes TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
The previous chapter explained how to use wizards to automate the positioning and sizing of
components.
Once the right component is included in the right location, you will probably have to perform
some operations on the neighboring parts.
For example, when including a screw, you will have to bore (or tap) the parts attached by the
screw, if they were not already.
These tasks are time-consuming and prone to errors. The right tapping depends on which
screw is to be used.
In addition, if the component changes or is moved, you must not "forget" to consider the
impacts on the neighboring parts. Otherwise, the assembly in the workshop may encounter
trouble and have some unkind words for the designer. (If you are a reader with a little
experience, you probably know what we mean.)
TopSolid makes it possible to automate this, which improves productivity and reduces the risk
of error.
Definitions
Automation occurs through a process that describes the operations to be performed on the
parts neighboring a component.
To define a process, start by creating a "Part Process" document on the "Advanced" tab in
the document creation command.
A process may be used when a component is included that provides a given function. For
example, you can create a "Tube slits" process that can create slits on a tube that will be
plugged with a component providing the "Plug" function, described in the previous chapter, to
make it easier to insert.
Functions
To tell the process which function to manage, use the "Tools > Use Function..." command.
This command creates a new folder, named after its function, under the "Functions" folder
designated for used functions in the entities tree.
Each publication of the used function contains a value, which is the value given when defining
the function.

For example, an axis published in the function definition will generate a published axis by
using the function.
Used Functions
"Plug" function
Target
The entities generated by the use of a function represent what any component providing this
function must publish.
The process definition will perform operations based on these entities on a target shape that
corresponds to the shape of a neighboring part in the assembly.
When the process is used on a component in an assembly, these operations will be applied to
the shapes of neighboring parts.
In the "Tube slits" process, for example, there will be a target shape representing the tube,
using the plane, axis, and interior diameter of the function.
You can then create a tool shape and subtract from the target shape.

Subtraction tool shape
Tube target shape
Operators
Once this is done, you must tell TopSolid which operations should be performed when the
process is used.
This is done by creating what are called operators, using the "Tools > Operator..." command
(whose use is described in the online help). Created entities are stored in the "Operators"
folder in the entities tree.
When defining an operator, besides specifying the operation to use, you also specify the
conditions in which it should be triggered, if you would like it to work automatically (see below).
There are several possible criteria, particularly the ability to trigger the operation if there is a
collision between a given shape and the part to be modified. All of this is described in the
command's online help.
Drivers
In some cases, you may want to be able to input values while using the process.
For example, for the tube slits, you may want the length of the slits not to be predetermined in
the process, but requested each time.
This is done by creating what are known as drivers, by selecting a parameter in the
parameters folder, and "dragging and dropping" into the drivers folder.

Inclusions
If the process must be used in different projects, place it in a shared project or, better yet, in a
library.
When an assembly includes a part providing a function and there is a process available to
manage this function, it starts as soon as the inclusion is validated.
If you do not wish to use processes, disable the "Assembly > Modes > Automatic Process"
mode.
If there are several processes that can manage the function, they are listed so that you can
select the appropriate one.
The process will then ask for the necessary information (driver values) to be entered.
The process will be applied to the neighboring parts detected by the operators, unless you
enable manual mode in the dialogue and select the parts you would like to modify.
Once the dialogue is validated, you then have a process operation in the assembly.
Note that the process can be applied only to the parts that are directly included in the
assembly, not when the part is in a subassembly.
Additionally, the documents for the modified parts are synchronized with the assembly via the
process, introducing a strong mutual dependence between these documents, which may not
always be desired (see the "Operations" chapter).
Dedicated Processes
What we have just seen therefore enables you to make certain manipulations automatic when
using general components that provide a specific function.
You may also want to automatically create operations when including a particular part that has
no function.
This is possible via dedicated processes.
To make a process dedicated to a particular part, edit the part's definition document and use
the "Tools > Create process..." command. Instructions are provided in the online help.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Drafting
Drafting

Drafting TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
A drafting is represented by a "drafting" document.
The first thing to do is to create new drafting document.
When you make the drafting of a part or an assembly, it is useful to name the part or assembly
document the same as the drafting document so they can be listed next to each other in the
project tree.
A quick method is available in this case: simply select the part or the assembly in the project
tree and use the "Drafting..." contextual command.
You can also adopt other conventions such as placing all drafts in a special folder.
What's most important is that you decide how you are going to organize the documents from
the start so that you're sure to be able to easily find them later.
Stages
A drafting document includes stages presented here in chronological order.
• Background: This stage contains operations allowing you to prepare your drafting, in
particular anything that is for the background, title block, etc...
• Drafting: This stage includes operations allowing you to execute your drafting, in particular,
projected views, dimensioning and detailing.
Standard
Before you begin, it is important to specify which drawing standard to use.
This is done by editing the "Standard" parameter in the parameters folder.
The standard controls certain conventions, such as:
• View layout settings (left-to-right view or left of front view).
• Dimension appearance settings (text on top of the dimension line or above).
• Threading end-on view settings (complete circle or three-quarter circle).
In general, when a drafting template is used, the standard has already been selected.
Border
The first thing you see when you create a drafting is the border of the drawing.
You can adjust the border according to your needs. To do this, use the "Tools > Border..."
command to edit it (you can also select the border and use the "Edit..." command in the
context menu).
Some characteristics of the border are defined by the drafting format used, which you can
adjust separately using the "Tools > Format..." command.
The name of the format is stored in a "Drafting Format" parameter in the parameters folder,
which may be used as search criteria in the PDM (see the "Searches" chapter later).

In general, when a drafting template is used, the border has already been set.
Scale
A drafting has an overall scale, defined by the "Scale" parameter in the parameters folder.
To modify it, select the parameter in the parameters folder and use the "Edit..." command in
the context menu, or use the "Tools > Scale..." command directly in the menu.
Title Blocks
After adjusting the border, you should generally create a title block using the "Sketch > Title
Block" command.
A drafting can include several title blocks, but usually only one is used.
A title block is edited the same way as a sketch (without sewing, see the "Sketches" chapter).
You can create dots, lines and use constraints to make sure the dimensions are what you
want.
You will generally start by drawing a rectangle, in which one of the vertexes will be an inside
corner of the border, and then draw separation lines to create extents, called cells, in which
different things can be placed.
You can also use the "Sketch > Divide cell..." command to divide the initial extent into several
cells by drawing separation lines, and by creating constraints to ensure all the created cells will
be the same size.

After the cells are created, you can start populating them using several different methods.
Most of the time, you will be creating text using the "Sketch > Text..." command.
You can also insert text that will display the value of certain parameters graphically by using
the "+" button in the text input field.
For example, to insert the value for the scale factor in the title block, click on the "+" sign,
select "Document Parameter..", then the "Scale" parameter, and then validate and position the
text.

When you are done, exit from editing mode as you would for a normal sketch, and the result
will be a print-quality title block.
Templates
Of course, all this work shouldn't have to be done every time you create a drafting!
Instead, you can create several documents with different common title blocks, and use them
as templates when creating new drafts.
Creating and using templates is described in the "PDM" chapter at the beginning of this
manual.
Sets
A drafting can be used to represent parts or assemblies.
The content in the drafting is defined by what is called a "set", which is created by using the
"View > Set..." command.
Created sets are listed in the sets folder in the entities tree.
In most cases, a drafting contains only one set, often consisting of one part or one assembly,
so using the main set is recommended.
It should be noted that when you define a set, you can also choose how it should be
represented (detailed, simplified, etc.), as well as the configuration in which articulated
assemblies should be projected.
Projected Views
Once the set is defined, you can create projected views to project the selected set's content
in a particular direction.
The first view must be a main view, which can be achieved by using the "View > Main
view... command.
This command, for which the online help provides instructions, automatically moves on next to
create auxiliary views, which can also be created later using the "View > Auxiliary view..."
command.

An auxiliary view is similar to a main view, except that it is dependent on the main view: if the
set or direction in which the main view is projecting is changed, the auxiliary view will
automatically follow.
Main View
Auxiliary views
There is an even faster method that will achieve the same result: just select the part or
assembly you want to make the drafting in the project tree and "drag and drop" into the
graphical area of the presumably current drafting document.
This simple procedure launches the creation of the corresponding set, and moves on next to
create views, starting with a main view.
Styles
To modify the appearance of a project view, simply edit it and make the necessary
adjustments in the dialog that appears.
This, however, can prove to be quite painstaking when there are a number of views. An
alternative solution is found through the concept of "style".
Certain view characteristics are defined in a "view style", which can then be assigned to one
or several views.
View styles are listed under the sub-folder "View Styles" in the "Styles" folder of the entities
tree (you will notice that there are other types of styles as you explore this folder, although
these have rather general meanings).
The view styles folder initially contains a style called "Normal", which cannot be edited and
corresponds to the drawing standard selected.
It also contains two styles called "Part" and "Assembly" that may be modified: the first will be
used by default when drafting a part, and the second when drafting an assembly.
You can also create a new view style using the "Tools > Styles > View style..." menu
command, or selecting the "View Styles" folder and using the "View Style..." command in the
context menu.

For example, you can create a new style "Normal + HL" based on the "Normal" style with
visible and dotted hidden lines.
Hidden lines visible
Line attributes inherited

from base style
Then, just edit the views and select the new style.
If the style must be used in most of the views that will be created afterwards, it is useful to
make it current (by using the "Make Current" command in the context menu), so that it will be
applied as the default style when you create other views.
When you create a document to be used as a model, it is useful to define common styles and
to make the one that will be used most often as the current style.
Projection Modes
There are two methods to project views in TopSolid:
• The fast projection mode, as its name suggests, reduces the time it takes to process, and
therefore allows you to stay productive even when you make the drafting of complex parts
or assemblies.
• The exact projection mode is used to obtain quality prints, at the expense of processing
time.
You can change the mode at any time by using the "View > Exact Projection" command. When
the mode is activated, the projection is exact, otherwise it is fast.
Switching from fast mode to exact mode does not cause dimensions or annotations to be lost,
so you can begin working in fast mode, and then switch to exact mode to finalize the drafting.
When working with moderately complex parts and assemblies, it is easier to work the entire
time in exact mode for better visual comfort.
Text from Set

Generally speaking, it is advisable to display the value of certain parameters for a drafted part
or assembly visually in the title block, which is referenced in a set.
For example, you will certainly want to put the part description in your drafting's title block.
To do this, edit the title block, go to the "Sketch > Text..." command like before, click on the "+"
sign in the text input field, and this time select the "Parameter From Set..." command.
Next, select the set and parameter for the referenced document, in this case the "Description",
then validate and position the text.

Part description
Since everything passes through the set, even if you change the set document, the text will be
able to display the parameter for the new document without needing to edit it manually.
This is especially useful for making drafting templates that include text that visually display
parameters of the drafted document: simply follow the same steps, then edit the set so that it
no longer references any document that makes the drafting become independent.
Detail Views
The "View > Detail View..." command lets you produce a detail view of an existing view.
The detail view is defined by a "detail" sketch delimiting the area of the reference view to
detail.
It is a normal sketch, and the regular sketch commands can be used to define a profile, which
should be closed. This profile can often consist of a simple circle.
If you want the detail view to automatically adjust to significant changes in what's drafted, you
should take the time to constrain the detail sketch content in relation to the content of the
reference view.
The detail view scale factor is, by default, double that of the reference view, but can be
modified by editing the view.
Detailed area
Reference view
Detail View

Cross Section Views

The "View > Cut..." command produces a cross section view of an existing view.
The principle is the same as for the detail view, except the sketch here is used to define a
cross section polygon. The profile must therefore be open and comprised of only lines.
Section Polygon
Cross Section View
Reference view
You can also make a local cross section (superimposed on the reference view) by using the
"View > Local Cross Section..." command.
Hatching
The hatching in the cross section depends on the category of the part material by default.
In addition, for certain types of materials (e.g. wood), it can also depend on the orientation of
the part fibers (see the "Parts" chapter).
However, it can be modified locally in order to distinguish the neighboring parts.
The "View > Automatic hatching..." command enables you to automatically modify the
orientation and spacing of the parts hatching so that the hatching of two neighboring parts is
visibly different.
Otherwise, it is possible to modify the hatching associated with a part manually by selecting
the hatching and using the "Edit" contextual command.
Detailing
It is sometimes necessary to draw over a view to add certain information, which can be
performed using the detailing sketch mode that makes each view available.
This sketch, which is initially empty, is superimposed on the view, and can be edited using the
"Edit Detailing..." command, which is accessible when a view is selected.
You will then be able to draw the sketch using the usual sketch commands.

It is also worth noting that you can hide segments in the view's content (by using the "Hide
Segments..." command in the context menu) so that changes can be made.
For example, if you want to add a fillet in your drafting to a part that doesn't include any in its
modeling, simply hide the two segments for the edges you want to circumscribe and redraw
over the top. However, this is usually a bad idea, because while the modeling and drafting of
the same part are different, this could lead to unfortunate mistakes (e.g. Mr. X subcontracts the
production of the part by exporting the 3D model, whereas Mr. Y in the assembly shop expects
to receive a part that looks like his drafting...).
Superimposed sketch
View's content
Axes
One of the ways to use the detailing sketch function is to create axis lines.
There are however two specialized commands that usually allow you to do this much faster.
The "Detailing > Automatic Axes..." command allows you to automatically create axes
corresponding to the rotating faces of the parts, and often achieves very good results.

The "Detailing > Axis..." command allows for higher quality work, and is in particular useful if
you only want to have certain axes represented.
Dimensioning
One of the most important tasks in drafting is dimensioning.
Creating dimensions is accomplished by two commands:
• The "Detailing > Dimension..." command is used for all simple dimensions.
• The "Detailing > Composite Dimension..." command is used for all composite dimensions,
which consist of multiple simple dimensions.
Composite dimension
Simple dimension
Dimensions include many parameters, see the online help for more details.
Tolerancing
When producing higher quality parts, it is becoming more and more necessary to use
tolerancing according to ISO standards, especially if the part is subcontracted out.
In fact, the advantage of this Geometric Product Specification (GPS ) method is that it is not
vague, as the former method was in certain cases.
Besides, some prime manufacturers now require that their subcontractors use this more
rigorous method, which eventually provides productivity gains by reducing the number of
defects.
As you have seen above, you can specify a tolerance for a part in your model, and you can
also specify it while creating your drafting.

This is done using the "Datum Feature...", "Geometric Tolerance..." and "Basic Dimension..."
commands from the "Detailing" menu.
Notes
Different types of notes can also be created, from simple text to intelligent text that
automatically displays information about the part, such as drilling information (for drilling note,
see the "Drillings" chapter), or information about bends on sheet metal (for bend note, see the
"Sheet metal" chapter).

Symbols
Several commands allow you to create different types of symbols.
• The "Detailing > Surface finish..." command is used to produce standardized symbols for
surface finishes.
• The "Detailing > Weld Symbol..." command is used to produce standardized symbols for
welds.
Surface Finish
Bill of Material
Drafting a bill of materials is described in the "Bill of Materials" chapter.
Pages
You can create a drafting on multiple pages with the same paper size.
To create a new page, click the "Add Page" icon located at the bottom of the document.
Displacement arrows Add Page
You can then change the current page either by clicking on the right or left displacement
arrows or by clicking on the tab of the desired page or by moving the page cursor located at
the bottom right of the graphic area.
Page cursor
The new views will be created on the current page.

You can choose on which page(s) a view or other types of entities (such as the title block) are
displayed by selecting the page and using the "Attributes..." popup command.
Page sorter
When a document contains several pages, it can be helpful to get a global preview of all the
pages. The « Page sorter » mode allows to display a slide with all the pages.

Page sorter
You can then change the page order by a drag and drop and the contextual menu allows to
insert a page before the selected one or delete it.
Print
When the drafting is completed, you can print it by using the "File > Print..." command.
This dialog contains the common printing settings (paper size, orientation, quality,...), the
setting of each printer (margins, thicknesses, dash length) will be done in the « Printing >
Printers Configuration » rubric of the « Tools > Options » command.
Multiple print
Once the project is complete, you may need to print all the documents.
The contextual commands « Multiple Print > Print Several Drafts...» and « Multiple Print >
Print Several Documents...» allows to print either all the drafting documents or all the external
documents (PDF, Word, Excel,...) and the drafting documents too.
However, the printings rules of the different papers should be defined in the « Printing >
Multiple Print » rubric of the « Tools > Options » command.

Drafting bundle Guide de l’utilisateur TopSolid’Design
Drafting bundle

Drafting bundle Guide de l’utilisateur TopSolid’Design
Introduction
When we have to make a presentation with all the drafting documents of a project, it is
convenient to create a drafting assembly. This assembly can be done thanks to a « Drafting
bundle » document available in the « Advanced » tab of the new document creation dialog
box. This document type allows to group several drafting documents with different paper sizes
into one document (for example, four documents A3 in one A1 document) in order to print
them or to create a presentation with slides.
Inclusion
The inclusion of a document can be done either by using the « Drafting bundle > Inclusion »
command or by a drag and drop of the drafting document into the drafting bundle document.
Then, it is possible to include a specific page or all the pages of the drafting document. In this
case, so many pages will be created in the drafting bundle document. As we can include
several documents into the same page, we need to define the paper size of this page, this can
be done thanks to the « Paper » contextual command.
Positioning and constraints

As for an assembly with parts (see Assembly chapter), the inclusion of a drafting document
generates a positioning operation. By default, an orientation constraint is automatically
created in order to include the document horizontally or vertically. Then, it is possible to
constrain each document using simple constraints based on points or axes.
Drafting modification
The modification of a drafting document can be done directly from the drafting bundle
document. It can be done by selecting the drafting document and run the « In place Edit »
contextual command. Then, all the drafting commands are available until the edition is ended
using the « In Place Editing » button.
Pages
Regarding pages, the behavior is the same than a drafting document. The tabs located at the
bottom of the screen allows to create new pages and the « Page Sorter » icon (see Drafting
chapter) allows to display them as a slides in order to sort them according to our needs.

Drawings Guide de l’utilisateur TopSolid’Design
Drawings

Drawings Guide de l’utilisateur TopSolid’Design
Introduction
Sometimes, it is necessary to draw a simple part whitout creating a 3d document and its
drafting document or to quickly modify an imported 2d document like a layout drawing or an
electrical scheme. This need can be filled by a Drawing document which allows to create a
pure 2d document without any associativity between elements.
Sketches
A drawing is made of sketches created with the Sketch command which asks for the sketch
name first. Each sketch is made of segments, profiles, sections (hatching pattern) and
detailing elements (dimensions and textes). The name of the current sketch (working sketch)
is displayed in the drop down list of the «Sketch» icon bar context.
The change of the current sketch is done either by choosing another sketch from the
dropdown list or through the "Make current" contextual command available on a sketch from
the Sketches folder of the entities tree.
Groups
For those who wants to structure the elements of their drawing, the «Sketch > Group...»
command allows to link geometry and annotations in order to select them easily. However, a
group cannot contains elements belonging to different sketches. Then, the grouped element
can be separated thanks to the «Explode» contextual command available from the selection of
a group in the entities tree or from the selection of a group element in the graphical area.
Dimensioning
The «Sketch > Dimension...» command allows to display the distance or the angle between 2
elements, the size of a circle or an arc of circle and the coordinate of a point. Unlike the part
document, the created dimensions are not constraint dimensions, they did not drive the
geometry, they are not retrieved during the inclusion of the drawing document into a drafting
document.
Modifications
When the «Free Displacement» mode is activated, a selected element can be moved by
dragging it with the left mouse button, otherwise the modification can be done using the
«Sketch > Transform...» command only. This command allows to apply:
- a translation according to different modes (distance, 2 points),
- a rotation - a scale factor,
- a symmetry according to an axis or a point.
The «Sketch > Transfer...» command allows to move the selected elements from a sketch to
another one (existing or new).
Drafting
Once the drawing is finished, the geometry can be transfered in drafting document in order to
create dimension or detailling. This can be done using the «Drafting» contextual command
available from the project tree or from the tab of the drawing document.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Bills of Material
Bills of Material

Bills of Material TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
The bill of material (BOM) is an essential point of passage in product design.
TopSolid allows you to create different types of BOMs for a product modeled in an assembly.
This BOM can then be referenced or exported to external applications (spreadsheet program,
management system, etc.).
It can also be inserted into a drafting, if your organization follows this procedure.
Assembly
To define a BOM, you should start by creating a "Bill of Material" document by going to the
"Common" tab in the document creation command.
Next, tell the system which assembly the BOM is for by using one of two methods:
• By "dragging and dropping" the assembly document from the project tree into the BOM
document window.
• By using the "Bill of Material > Assembly..." command menu.
Columns
You can define columns in the BOM by using the "Bill of Material > Columns..." command, for
which the online help provides instructions.
You can also add or delete columns by right-clicking on the title of the column.
It is generally useful to create several document templates and adjust the columns according
to your preferences, then use a template to create a new BOM document.
You can also adjust the columns to be identical to another BOM document by using the "Bill of
Material > Columns as..." command.
You can also do this by "dragging and dropping" the BOM document being used as a template
in the project tree into the window for the BOM document you want to modify.

Multi-levels
By default, the created BOM is "flat", meaning that it only defines parts, not intermediate sub-
assemblies.
This type of BOM is useful for producing estimates or managing sales.
You may also want to be able to visualize the composition of an assembly better, which can be
achieved using the "multi-level" mode by going to the "Bill of Material > Multi-levels"
command.
Simple Assemblies
Some assemblies should not be broken down into parts in the BOM, such as a ball bearing (no
one cares about the breakdown of its parts, except of course if you are the manufacturer).
You should then declare the assembly in the BOM as being "simple" (instead of the
"composite" default value) by editing "Assembly > Type for BOM...".
Export
To open the produced BOM in a spreadsheet or any other application, you can export to
"CSV" format.
This is done the same way as for any other export, by selecting the document from the project
tree and using the "Import / Export > Export document with conversion..." command in the
context menu.

Most spreadsheet programs on the market are capable of importing this file format and
recreating the columns.
Drafting
After the BOM is completely defined, you can insert it into a drafting.
Once the drafting document is open, this can be accomplished two different ways:
• By "dragging and dropping" the BOM document from the project tree to the drafting
document window.
• By using the "Detailing > BOM table..." command menu.

Indexes
You will usually want to make an index for the parts in the general plan that make up the BOM.
You can do this by using the "Detailing > Index of Bill of Material..." command.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Exploded
Exploded

Exploded TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
When you create an assembly and want to make its drafting, you sometimes need to move
apart the parts and subassemblies to have a better view of the inside of the product.
This is done in two steps, first by producing a three-dimensional exploded view of the
assembly using an "Exploded" document, then making the drafting from this exploded view in
lieu of the initial assembly.
Assembly
To produce an exploded view, start by creating an exploded document by going to the
"Common" tab in the document creation command menu.
Next, tell the system which assembly the exploded view should be performed on by the
following two methods:
• By "dragging and dropping" the assembly document from the project tree into the exploded
document window.
• By using the "Exploded > Include..." command menu.
Once this is done, the assembly to explode is displayed in the center of the screen.

Displacements
You will usually next want to make part or sub-assembly displacements by using either the
"Explosion > Translation..." or "Explosion > Rotation..." command, for which the online help
For example, to raise the top from a piece of furniture, you need to execute a translation by
setting the direction as Z+ and selecting the top.

Explosion Lines
You can visualize displacements using explosion lines by checking the "explosion lines" box
in the displacement dialog.
There are several available options for accessing different types of lines, as described in the
online help.
Explosion Line
Reference Part
When you string displacements together, it may be useful to define the next part to move as a
reference part for the current displacement.
When a part is moved, all displacements that declare the part as a reference part are also
affected.
For example, you can translate pins on the left side upward by using the side panel as a
reference, and then translating it to the left side: the pins will follow the move.
Another solution would consist of translating the side AND pins to the left, and then only the
pins upward.

However this second method becomes very painstaking if you are exploding an assembly
made up of a significant number of "layers".
First displacement
Displacement reference
Second
displacement
Groups
For large assemblies, it may not be very practical to select the entities you want to move each
time, so instead you can define "groups" using the "Explosion > Group..." command.
When performing a displacement, you can select a group instead of entities.
Automatic Displacements
In certain situations, it is possible to perform an automatic displacement using the
"Explosion > Axial Displacement...", "Explosion > Spherical Displacement..." commands, ...
These displacements produce an exploded view quickly, but they are only serviceable when
the assembly you want to explode has strong symmetries, which unfortunately is not often the
case.
That said, when you are lucky to have favorable conditions, these commands help you save a
lot of time.

Existing Exploded Views

When you produce an exploded view on an assembly in which some sub-assemblies have
already been exploded in the exploded document, it is possible to reuse them locally using the
"Explosion > Include Existing Explodeds..." command, for which the online help provides
instructions.
Drafting
Drafting an exploded view is created the same way as for an assembly.
When you want it to appear in the BOM, first prepare the BOM for the assembly (with no
exploded views!), and then insert it in the drafting as shown in the "Bill of materials" chapter.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Mountings
Mountings

Mountings TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
As the final assembly of certain products will have to be done by the client, you will need to
explain the mounting procedure.
Sometimes, you also need to explain the unmounting procedure, especially for maintenance
purposes.
This chapter presents the functions available to help you meet these requirements.
Exploded Views
First, you will need to make an exploded view by defining the groups corresponding to the
elements that are mounted at the same time.
For example, the following small assembly:

Can be exploded in two stages:
Stages
Once this has been completed, divide the exploding process into mounting stages (these
stages have nothing to do with the general notion of an operations stage).
For this, you need to display the operations tree, select the last displacement operation for
each stage and use the "Mounting stage..." contextual command, whose instructions can be
found in the online help.
Once the stages are created after the selected operation, they need to be defined starting from
the bottom and ascending in the chronology of the explosion.

Mounting stages
You can view the mounting stages defined in this way using the "Mounting > View mounting
stages..." command.
By default, the title of the first mounting stage created is assigned the number "1", which
matches in the event it is dismounted: at the beginning, everything is mounted, which matches
the start of the explosion chronology.
If this is not the case, you will need to change the titles by editing the operations, or by using
the "Mounting > Rename Mounting Stages..." command.
Notices
It is now possible to make a mounting notice.
To do this, create a drafting of the exploded document and to select, when defining the set to
be projected, "Mounting stages".
It will then be possible to create as many views as there are stages to form the notice.
Based on the same principle, you can make an unmounting notice.

Animations
A modern and efficient way of explaining how to mount (or unmount) an assembly involves
making a mounting animation.
To do this, you can use the "Mounting > Automatic Animation..." or "Mounting > Animation..."
commands following instructions in the online help.
It will then be possible to make a video for the customer using the "Mounting > Record
Animation..." command.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Drillings
Drillings

Drillings TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
In addition to operations performed on purely geometric shapes such as extrusions or
pockets, TopSolid includes operations specific to mechanics that factor in expertise of the
"trade".
The drilling function is part of this type of operation, and is used very frequently.
This chapter explains how to use this function so you can enjoy the productivity gains it brings.
Primitives
Drilling is defined as a series of basic drilling primitives, in which the most common are:
• The "Hole" primitive is a simple smooth hole that can be blind or through.
• The "Countersinking" primitive is for making a countersunk hole.
• The "Spot Facing" primitive is for making a spot face.
• The "Tapped Hole" is for making a hole that is partially tapped.
• The "Clearance Hole" primitive is for making a smooth through hole that allows a screw
with a given nominal diameter to pass through.
To define a drilling process, refer to the list of available primitives and use one or several of
them.
For example, to make a simple smooth hole, the "Hole" primitive is sufficient by itself.
On the other hand, to make a smooth countersunk hole, you must use a "Countersinking"
primitive and a "Hole" primitive.
Primitives should be taken in the order they appear in the drilling process, from top to bottom
(e.g. countersinking before the hole).
Templates
To perform a drilling operation, use the "Shape > Drilling..." command, for which the online
help provides instructions.
You must first choose what type of drilling process you want to do.
You can do this several ways:
• Either by using a predefined model (icons on the top-left side).
• Or by defining a customized drilling process (next icon).
• You can also store a model (next icon), which can then be searched using the model
explorer (next icon).
Once the model is selected, the corresponding primitives can be specified in the next sections
of the dialog.

Customize
Name of drilling
template used
Add to
templates
Predefined Explore
templates templates
Primitives
Frames
The drilling position is defined by a frame.
The direction direction is in reference to the Z axis of this frame in the direction of negative
coordinate values.
The drilling origin is in reference to either the frame origin or the intersection between the
frame's Z axis and the face to drill (selected in the drilling advanced options).
For a new drilling, the frame can automatically be created, but you can also select an existing
frame, or else create a frame "on-the-fly" using the "+" button (see the "Tools" chapter).
Tolerances
When you want to make a precise smooth hole, also called boring, make a normal smooth
hole, and assign a tolerance (for example "H7").
First, reference a library at the project level containing a "Dimensional tolerance standard"
definition document, such as the TopSolid mechanical library.
Then, simply place a tolerance on the diameter using the special entries that can be accessed
using the "+" button in the entry field (see the "Tools" chapter).
Then check the "Tolerance" box in the "Hole" primitive, and select the standard and tolerance.
The tolerance will then be assigned to the hole, and the information will be propagated up to
drafting and manufacturing.
Threadings
The "Tapped Hole" primitive is for drilling after tapping.
To do this, reference a library at the project level containing a "Threading Standard" definition
document, such as the TopSolid mechanical library.
Then select the standard and nominal diameter, or even the pitch if several pitches are
possible.

You can also tap an existing drilling, or generally speaking any hollow cylindrical face (such as
for an imported part).
This is accomplished using the "Shape > Tapping..." command.
Similarly, you can also thread a solid cylindrical face using the "Shape > Threading..."
command.
When you perform a threading operation, the pitch is sometimes determined automatically
according to the nominal diameter (when there is a single pitch per diameter in the standard).
If you want to use the value of this pitch to perform other operations, you must create a
threading pitch parameter whose value is equal to the pitch of the threaded face, by using
the "Tools > Parameters > Threading Pitch Parameter..." command.
Clearance Holes
When a clearance hole must be made for a screw with a given diameter, refer to tables
(either standardized or in-house) to find the value for the diameter of the hole to make.
To save time and avoid mistakes, these values can be defined once for all in a "Clearance
Hole Standard" document, which allows you to specify values for three different sizes: "Fine",
"Medium " and "Large".
You cannot create your own standard or use a supplied standard, such as from the TopSolid
mechanical library.
Next, use the "Clearance hole" drilling primitive and specify which standard to use and select
the size.
Screw Spot Facings

Similarly, when a spot facing is required to bury a screw of a given diameter, lookup tables
are often used.
To save time and avoid mistakes, it is possible to define these values once and for all in a
"Screw Spot Facing Standard" document, which allows you to specify values for two different
head sizes: "Cylindrical" and "Hexagonal".
You can create your own standard or use a supplied standard, such as from the TopSolid
mechanical library.
Next, use the "Screw Spot Facing" drilling primitive and specify the standard to use and the
head type.
Drilling Groups
When several identical drilling processes must be made on the same planar face, there are
several options available.
First, you can make an initial drill, then repeat it.
Another and sometimes more flexible method is to create a drilling group, defined by a sketch.
You should first create a sketch on the face to drill containing isolated points to serve as the
drilling origins.
Next, use the "Shape > Drilling Group..." command.

Drafting
In the drafting, the threads of the tapped holes and screw threads are represented.
It is possible to dimension them and obtain the threading description, for example "M12" for an
ISO metric screw with a nominal diameter of 12mm.
The "Detailing > Drilling Text..." command allows you to produce text describing the principal
values of a drilling primitive.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Sheet Metal
Sheet Metal

Sheet Metal TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
One of the procedures for manufacturing mechanical parts involves a sheet of metal of varying
thickness to be cut, punched, or bent. This type of part is called a sheet metal part.
Sheet metal parts can be modeled using the tools described in the previous chapters, but
TopSolid also has the ability to model sheet metal parts in an extremely productive way.
In addition, some concepts that are specific to this kind of part, such as computing the flat
shape before bending, may be supported, making production easier.
A sheet metal part is created in a part document because it is a part, but its modeling is done
using the "Sheet Metal" menu commands, in addition to the normal commands.
Shapes
A sheet metal part is made up of a sheet metal shape. More precisely, its detailed
representation must contain at least one sheet metal shape.
We will see later how to create a sheet metal shape.
To check whether a shape is made of sheet metal, select it and use the "Analyze Sheet
Metal..." contextual command, which should appear if it is indeed a sheet metal shape.
It is possible to make a multi-shape sheet metal part, like a normal part, but if there are
several sheet metal shapes in the detailed representation, they should have the same
thickness, which will be the thickness of the sheet metal part.
Parameters
When the part meets these criteria and therefore represents a sheet metal part in the
prescribed form, the following two parameters appear in the parameter folder:
• Sheet Metal: This Boolean parameter is "True" for a sheet metal part. It makes it possible
to search for all sheet metal parts (see the "Searches" chapter) by using the criteria "Sheet
Metal = True".
• Thickness: This parameter represents the thickness of the sheet metal measured on the
finished sheet metal part.
These parameters are kept up-to-date by the "Sheet Metal Properties Management" operation
in the "Analyze" stage. This is why they are grayed when working in the "Modeling" stage.
If the validity criteria for a sheet metal part can no be longer verified, this operation will
automatically set the "Sheet Metal" property to "False".
If you would like to make the thickness of the sheet metal a parameter during the design, you
cannot use the "Thickness" parameter, which is dependent. Instead, you must create another
parameter, perhaps called "t", to use during the modeling.
Normally, once the part is finished, you will have the same value for "t" and "Thickness".
Creations
There are different ways of creating a sheet metal shape.
The simplest method consists of making a sketch and using the "Sheet Metal > Sheet Metal
on Sketch..." command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
Another method is to model a surface shape through various methods and then transform it
into sheet metal by giving it a thickness, using the "Sheet Metal > Sheet Metal by
Thickening..." command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
You can also use the "Transition Sheet Metal..." command, which is for creating transition
shapes for metalworking. It enables you to create standard hopper shapes while respecting
the design rules for this type of part.

Yet another method is to model, or more often import, a solid shape corresponding to a sheet
metal and converting it into a sheet metal shape by recognition, using the "Sheet Metal >
Sheet Metal Recognition..." command, whose use is detailed in the online help.
Lateral Faces
A sheet metal shape has two sets of faces that correspond to the two sides of the sheet metal
that has been bent. The faces that do not belong to these two sides are called lateral faces.
A lateral edge is an edge joining two lateral faces.
By default, the lateral faces of sheet metal are shown in yellow, but you can disable this using
the "Visualization > Display Lateral Faces" command.
Lateral Face
Bend
Bends
When the sheet metal shape has been created, depending on the scenario, one or more
bends may have been produced.
Specifically, if you made sheet metal from a sketch by extrusion, bends may be generated
where there were vertices in the sketch, if requested.
Operations
All of the shape operations are applicable to a sheet metal shape, which is considered a shape
like the others. Of course, the relevance of using these operations is up to the user.
However, some operations are used more often than others. This is clearly true of operations
for removing material.
The union operations require a few more precautions in positioning the sheets of metal to join
(which, to put it simply, must be positioned according to the contiguous lateral faces), but you
can apply them to sheet metal shapes.
To add the material to sheet metal, however, you would generally prefer to use the sheet
metal operations that have been designed for that purpose, using the "Sheet Metal" menu
commands.
The available sheet metal operations fall into various categories:
• Operations for adding material to the part by extension ("Flange...", "Covering...", "Hem

Bend...", "Swept Flange...")

• Operations creating or working with bends ("Bend on edge...", "Bend along a line...", "Fold
or unfold a bend...")
• Operations for removing material or for breaking that make the sheet metal unbendable
("Corner Relief...", "Edge Relief...", "Slot")
• Other operations ("Standard Forming...", "Lateral Faces Straightening...")
Sheet metal operations only apply to sheet metal shapes.
For most of them, like "Flange", this is because they only have significance for sheet metal.
Others are specializations of a general shape operation, which allows for a simplified
implementation and faster execution of the command. For example, this is true of the "Sheet
Metal > Angle Relief..." command, which very quickly applies curves or chamfers to the lateral
edges of sheet metal.
Advanced
For advanced use of sheet metal and for difficult scenarios in which the standard commands
are not enough to model the designed sheet metal shape, the "Sheet Metal > Face Side..."
menu command is particularly useful.
It allows general modeling operations to be used to change the geometry of the shape and to
redefine added sections as sheet metal faces.
For example, you can make a thick shape for the side of a sheet of metal and then join it with
the sheet metal. The added faces will automatically be defined as side faces if they are
tangential to the faces of the sheet metal, or they will be transformed into lateral faces. The
"Face Side..." command then re-assigns these faces to the good side of the sheet metal in
case of a problem.
Unfolding Rules
Documents
To support bends, it is important to know how the sheet metal will unbend and, more
specifically, what will be the dimensions of the sheet metal before bending to get the bent
modeled shape. These are the unfolding rules.
The rules for unfolding are defined in a "Unfolding rules" document, located in the "Special"
tab for the document creation command.
It is also possible to use the standard rules provided in the TopSolid mechanical library, found
in the "Unfolding rules" folder in the "Sheet metal" folder.
Generally, in companies that commonly produce sheet metal parts, it is worthwhile to define
the company's normal rules for unfolding in a shared library that will be easy to reference in
the projects.
Basically, the rules for unfolding define unbending methods for each thickness, bending
radius, and bending angle.
An unbending method contains three parameters for computing the unrolled length of a bend:
• The "T" calculation type (neutral fiber, internal dimension, external dimension, tangent
internal dimension, tangent external dimension).
• The neutral fiber coefficient "K".
• The correction "C".

Tables
In the "Tables" tab, you can define the unfolding methods used to calculate the unfolding of
parts.
This tab includes a "default" unbending method that is used when no other method is
appropriate.
You can then define the table definition mode:
• By couples (thickness, bending radius).
• By ratios (bending radius / thickness).
In the by couples mode, you can define a list of thicknesses. For each thickness, you can
define a list of bending radii.
A bending radius can be defined using a bending tool (which gives the radius to use). This list
may be blank. The bending methods that will be defined for the given thickness will then be
valid, regardless of the requested bending radius.
For each bending radius, you can also define a list of bending angles. This list might also be
blank, meaning that the defined bending method will be valid, regardless of the requested
bending angle.
For each bending angle, you define the bending method to use, the parameters (T, K, C).
In ratios mode, you define a list of "bending radius/thickness" ratios.
For each ratio, you can also define a list of bending angles (see above).
This method allows the "Theoretical" or "DIN6935" methods for calculating loss.
Tools
The "Tools" tab is used to describe "Bending tools".
This description is very simple, but it is enough to render many services.
A bending tool is described by:
• A description
• An internal bending radius value
• A related bending process type
• A Ve width
• A Ve flange width
• A bending stress
Their descriptions must be unique for each bending tool.
However, several tools can have the same internal bending radius.
For example, you can define a tool with an internal radius of 1mm and an "air coining" bending
process type that will be valid for all bending angles and also define a tool with the same
internal radius but with a "coining" bending process type that is valid only for a bending angle
of 90° and provides a different bend loss calculation. Similarly, you can define a bending tool
with a 1mm inner radius and a "hem-bending" process that will be used to calculate this type
of bend.
Processes
The "Processes" tab describes the processing rules for developable surfaces commonly found
on metalworking parts. It allows you to choose between rolling or crunching and to set the
parameters associated with each of these methods.
Association
After creating a sheet metal part, it is advisable to associate it with unfolding rules.

Some sheet metal operations require to know which unbending method to be used in order to
accurately offset the bend losses.
This is the case, for example, with the "Sheet Metal > Bend Along a Line..." and "Sheet
Metal > Unbending of Bend..." operations.
The unfolding rules to use for a sheet metal part are chosen using the "Sheet Metal >
Unfolding Rules" command. If no unfolding rules are explicitly defined with this command, the
default rules will be used, which correspond to a calculation by neutral fiber in the material
(K factor = 0.5).
Using unfolding rules from the start of the design presents other advantages.
For example, if you decide to use bending tables, the system will suggest thicknesses and
bending radii defined in these tables as recommended values in all sheet metal operations. A
company can thus configure the thicknesses and bending radius that it would like to require
from these designers.
Unfolding
Documents
If you would like to manufacture the sheet metal part, you can calculate its unfolding with
TopSolid.
The unfolding is performed in a specific document, not in a part document.
There are several advantages to this:
• The part definition document is not modified. All of the documents that use it (assemblies,
drafts, etc.) are therefore not impacted.
• This document can be seen as belonging to the "methods department", which offers many
opportunities. For example, we can then allow certain modifications to the geometry of the
part to aid its unfolding (addition of reliefs) or to help with the manufacturing of the part
(addition of bending flaps).
• It is "easy" to find a sheet metal part that has been unfolded. Simply search for an unfolding
document in the documents referencing the part document.
• Finally, the document includes a list of commands for unfolding smoothly, which helps with
the application.
Inclusion
This is the first stage in creating an unfolding operation.
It makes it possible to "import" a copy of a part to be processed (by default, this copy
consumes only a very small amount of memory).
You select the document containing the part to be processed, the representation to use, and
the part to use in the chosen representation.
At this time, you also choose the unfolding rules that will be used.
By default, they come from the part document, but you can redefine them locally. This is not
recommended, however, as it surely means that the rules used in the part document are not
right.
The included part is placed into a special representation: "Part Representation".
Only one part to be processed may be included in an unfolding document. Nesting is therefore
not supported in an unfolding document.
An unfolding command can be run directly, and the part inclusion operation is then called
automatically.

Unbending Process
This operation forces the unfolding method that will be used to calculate the unrolled length of
a bend.
There are three available definition modes:
• Definition of the unbending method by requiring parameters (T, K, C).
• Definition of the process type used (Not Specified, Air Coining, Coining, Hem Bending,
Dimpling, Roll Bending, etc.).
• Definition of the tool used (by its description).
The last two definition types make it possible to specify the conditions of the search to be
performed on the bending tables.
Some unbending processes are required by the use of sheet metal operations on bends, such
as the "Bend Along a Line" and "Unbending/Rebending of Bend" operations, which calculate
the unbending/rebending length during their execution. They cannot be modified in an
unfolding document because that would result in incorrect unbending lengths. They can be
modified, however, in the corresponding sheet metal operation.
This operation also allows you to select the method – rolling or crunching – for processing
developable surfaces and to define the parameters associated with each.
Unfolding
The unfolding operation can make it possible to create a sketch of the unfolding of the part.
The positioning of this resulting sketch can be precisely defined.
It is also possible to define the attributes for representing the external contours, internal
contours, and upward and downward bends.
The initial contents of this sketch cannot be changed (they come from the result of the
unfolding), but you can apply sketch operations to them.
The sketch created from the unfolding is inserted into the document's detailed representation.
Physical Properties and Enclosing Box

When saving an unfolding document and when you are in the analysis stage, a series of
properties related to the unfolding is calculated, along with the dimensions of the enclosing
box. These properties are accessible through the PDM and may be used for searching.
Extracted information is configured (similarly to what is done in a part document) by the
"Unfolding Physical Properties" and "Unfolding Enclosing Box" operations. Note that their
values can be forced manually.
The available properties are:
• Thickness.
• Number of bends.
• Perimeter.
• Cut-Outs Perimeter.
• Surface area.
• Surface area without holes.
• Volume.
• Mass.
• The X and Y dimensions (in the destination frame of the unfolding) and the Z dimension (or
thickness).
• The position of the center of mass.

These properties are also available in the part document by using the "Sheet Metal > Sheet
Metal Properties..." command. They are therefore directly available in the BOM without having
to make an unfolding.
Dimensioning
You can use the "Tools > Dimension" command to quickly check some measurements on the
calculated unfolding. However, detailed dimensioning of the unfolding is to be done in a
drafting document.
Please note that these dimensions are created in the "Annotation" stage of the document.
Consequently, they are not visible when the "Modeling" stage is active.
Multiple Unfoldings
You can create or update an assembly unfolding with the "Multiple Unfoldings" command. This
command is accessible from the project tree via the Assembly documents' popup menu, or
the commands for the Bill of Material document.
Note that the exact positioning of the unfolding can be precisely controlled from the part
document by using the "Unfolding Positioning" command. You can then ensure the sheet
metal is rolled in the proper direction on the unfolding.
Export
Commands for exporting documents with conversion offer a format specific to unfolding
documents: TopSolid'Smi ("Sheet Metal Manufacturing Information"). This format includes a
description of the unfolding that can be used to send or update unfoldings in our
TopSolid'SheetMetal CAM module.
Aside form the standard way of accessing the export with conversion commands, direct
access to these commands are available in the unfolding documents: "Unfolding > Export
Unfolding with Conversion...", "Unfolding > Export Multiple Unfoldings with Conversion...".
Drafting
A sheet metal part is drafted exactly like any other mechanical part.
However, if it has been unbent, it is also possible to make its drafting.
The drafting of an unfolding is done using the "Unfolding" document, which should contain the
result of the part's unfolding in its detailed representation.
Note that the "Unfolding" document also contains the geometric definition of the part (in the
"Part" representation). This document can therefore be used as a basis for creating the
detailed drafting of sheet metal with the related unfolding.
The analysis properties extracted while unfolding are available for use in a title block or a bill of
materials.
The "Automatic Bend Notes" and "Bend Note" commands allow you to list the characteristics
of the bends and to provide additional information about the unfolding process.
This information includes:
• Radius
• Angle
• Unbending method used
• K factor
• Correction
• Method source (default, user, or design)

• Bending type (if defined)

• Bending tool (if defined)
• Upward/downward bend
• Unrolled Length
• Equivalent neutral fiber coefficient
The "automatic bend notes" operation may be created in an empty drafting document which
could be used as a template, it will afterwards be automatically updated when making the
drafting.


Nesting Guide de l’utilisateur TopSolid’Design
Nesting

Nesting Guide de l’utilisateur TopSolid’Design
Introduction
Parts with the same thickness are sometimes grouped in order to be cut on a big size sheet
metal part or a big size panel. This can be done thanks to a «Nesting» document available in
the «Advanced» tab of the new document creation dialog box.
This document type allows to group several part documents in order to position a given
quantity on a support part. The main aim is to optimize the occupation on the support part in
order to position as much parts as possible.
Parts to nest
The thickness of the parts to nest must have to be lower or equal to the thickness of the
support part and the materials must have to be the same too. Before runing the nesting
computation, it is necessary to define the face allowing to position the part on the support part.
This can be done thanks to the « Tools > Function > Provide Machinable Component
Function...» command which allows to select a frame on the positionning face.
Supports
The support parts are part documents where parts to nest will be positioned. In most of case,
we use rectangular shapes but circular or any kind of shape can be used as well. As much as
possible, they have the same properties than the parts to nest (thickness, material).
Nesting
The « Nesting > Automatic nesting...» command displays 3 tabs allowing to define settings
and run the nesting.
• The Parts tab contains the list of parts to position, the parts are directly dragged and dropped
from the project tree. For each part, it is possible to define the wanted quantity, the security
gap with other parts, the authorized rotation angles and a color.
• The Supports tab contains the list of support parts to use, the support parts are directly
dragged and dropped from the project tree. For each support, it is possible to define the
wanted quantity and the margins.
• The Options tab contains the list of additional settings like the computation time and checking
options (thickness, material,...).
A high computation time value allows to optimize the nesting result in order to nest a maximum
amount of parts on the same support part.
Results and modifications

From the operations tree, a right click on a nesting operation allows to edit it and to re-display
the nesting dialog box with a new tab named «Nestings».
This tab contains the nesting result with the loss rate of each support, the list of used supports
and for each support, the list of nested parts.
In the Parts tab, when the wanted quantity of a part has not been reached, the «used quantity»
cell is displayed with an orange background.
When the wanted quantity of one (or several) part(s) is increased, it is possible to complete the
nesting in order to add part at the end of the existing nesting or to totally recompute the
nesting.
.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Chassis
Chassis

Chassis TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
This chapter introduces the functions available to produce a mechanically welded chassis.
Some of these functions can also be used in other contexts. For example, welds can be made
between two mechanical parts that aren't necessarily extruded bars of a chassis.
A chassis is produced inside an assembly document, which will presumably be up-to-date
later on.
It is good practice to use this document exclusively for chassis parts, and to include them in an
upper-level assembly, which could be the complete product or one of its sub-assemblies.
This in particular allows you to produce the chassis BOM (as defined in the the assembly
BOM) for its manufacture.
In addition, the chassis can be regarded as a single part when developing the product BOM
(you don't want to include the breakdown of its extruded bars here), as explained in the "Bill of
Materials" chapter.
Skeleton
The first stage consists of creating a wireframe skeleton representing all or part of the neutral
fibers of the extruded bars that will form the chassis.
The most convenient method is to create a sketch (planar or spatial, depending on the type
of chassis) that contains only segments and no profiles (see the "Sketches" chapter) in order
to produce a wire mesh.
Usually, large dimensions are outer dimensions, so it is wise to ensure that the neutral fibers
are placed on the outside corners of the chassis.
You then want to make sure that the extruded elements are placed inside these boundaries to
ensure that the design constraints (outer dimensions) will be obeyed if you change the section
of an extruded bar later.

Another option is to produce at the time of assembly a local shape with edges that
correspond to segments in the sketch. The advantage of this method is the ability to use
commands for modifying shapes so that you quickly obtain rather complex structures.
However this method is not as flexible in terms of modification capabilities (with a sketch, it is
easy to remove, add or modify segments).
Extruded Bars
After the skeleton is created, you need to "detail" it with extruded bars.
To do this, first reference a library at the project level containing families of extruded bar type
definitions, such as the "TopSolid ISO mechanical library".
You can then create extruded bars using the "Modeling > Extruded Bar..." command, for which
If you have already created extruded bars and want to add additional ones of the same type,
select an existing extruded bar before running the command, which will pre-select the family
and code for the new extruded bar type so that it is identical to the one you selected.

Materials
Each extruded bar is actually a derived part from an end of the selected type of extruded bar.
By default, the material and the coating of the derived extruded bar is the same as that of the
type of extruded bar used.
This can be changed by editing the part corresponding to the derived extruded bar, and by
using the "Tools > Material and coating..." command (see chapter on "Parts").
In this case, uncheck the "Derive material" and "Derive coatings" boxes, then select the
material and coating.
Descriptions
The description of the extruded bar is by default the same as that of the type of extruded bar
used, for example "Square hollow extruded bar 40 x 20, ISO 4019".
This method of description is often very useful when making a chassis, but may not be suitable
if you are using an extruded bar end to make a mechanical part for a particular purpose.
Here, it is better to assign a description that characterizes the part function rather than the
extruded bar type, such as "Low Transverse", for example.
For this, edit the part corresponding to the derived extruded bar, and edit its derivation
operation by running the "Tools > Derivations > Derivation..." command, then uncheck the
"Description" box.
It will then be possible to edit the description like a normal part.
Bill of Material
The parameters folder of the extruded bar contains three new parameters that are calculated
automatically, and that can be used as properties when producing the chassis BOM:
• Length: This is the length of the extruded bar after cutting, i.e. the length of the smallest
bar required to make the extruded bar (margins usually need to be added before ordering a
rough bar for cutting).
• Trimming Angle 1: This is the angle that makes the front of the extruded bar end in
relation to the direction of the extruded bar once the cuts have been made. A straight trim
corresponds to an angle of 90°, otherwise the angle will be less.
• Trimming Angle 2: This is the angle of the other end. If both angles are different, the larger
is taken as being the first angle.
Definitions
If the type of extruded bar that you want to use is unavailable in a standard library, you have
the option of defining a new type of extruded bar, which will then be managed with the same
ease.
It is worth placing these definitions in a library that can then be used in different projects. In
addition, in order not to mix everything, you are advised to create an "Extruded bars" folder
where you can store all the definitions of the extruded bar types.
First, create a generic part to represent a parameterized extruded bar, so you need to make a
new part document and give it the name of the type of extruded bar.
You then need to make a sketch on the XY plane to define the extruded bar section. This
sketch must be dimensioned using the parameters that will be used to vary the section of the
extruded bar based on the instances of the family.
You also need to create two specific points in this sketch: the top-right and bottom-left corners
of the rectangle enclosing the section.

Top-right point
Bottom-left point
Then, you need to make a centered extruded shape whose length will be a parameter, which
can be called "l", for example.
So, you need to tell TopSolid that it is an extruded bar by providing the "Extruded bar"
function, which requires the "TopSolid Mechanical" library to be referenced, which contains its
definition.
For this, you need to run the "Tools > Provide function..." command and select the "Extruded
bar" function.
Then you will need to complete the function by editing each of its members (by selecting them
in the entities trees and using the "Edit..." contextual command"), in the following way:
• Top-right point: Select the top-right point defined in the sketch.
• Bottom-left point: Select the bottom-left point defined in the sketch.
• Frame: Select the absolute frame.
• Length: Select the "l" parameter used for the length of the extruded bar.
You can also assign a material and a coating to the part. In this case, when you use this type
of extruded bar, the extruded bar created will have this material, and their physical properties
will be calculated (mass, center of mass and moments of inertia).
It will also be useful to configure the description using the code, as explained in the
"Families" chapter, in order to manage the BOM.
Once the generic part has been finalized, you need to create a family.
You then need to define any one driver that will be the "l" parameter defining the length of the
extruded bar.
For the remainder, it is possible to define as many codes as you want, using the other part
parameters.
When inserting the extruded bar, a bar of sufficient length will be generated automatically, and
will be recut to the right size.

Cuts
Once the extruded bars are placed, adjust them by performing cuts.
Cuts allow you to trim an extruded bar in relation to another extruded bar by removing or
adding material (the term "cut" is therefore a bit misused, but has the advantage of being
simple).
There are three types of cuts:
• A miter trim allows you to trim two extruded bars simultaneously in relation to each other
using the bisector plane ("Modeling > Miter Trim..." command).
• A main trim allows you to trim an extruded bar in relation to another that will not be
modified ("Modeling > Main Trim..." command).
• A planar trim allows you to trim an extruded bar in relation to a given plane in the
assembly ("Modeling > Planar Trim..." command).
Main trims
Miter Trims

Welds
Once the extruded bars are adjusted, you can make welds, of which two types are available:
• An angle weld allows you weld two sets of non-tangent faces ("Modeling > Angle Weld..."
command).
• A groove weld is otherwise used ("Modeling > Groove Weld..." command).
Angle weld


TopSolid’Design User's Guide Piping
Piping

Piping TopSolid’Design User's Guide
Introduction
This chapter introduces the functionalities available to produce piping, which may be used as
part of a factory unit or as part of a machine using fluids.
Piping consists of one or more piping lines made of a series of tubes and elbows, in which
piping inserts (valves, reducers, etc.) are placed.
Piping is produced inside an assembly document, which will presumably be current later.
Lines
The first step is to create a new piping line.
To do this, first reference the "TopSolid Mechanical" library and a library containing tube and
elbow definition families at the project level, such as the "TopSolid CEN Mechanical" library.
You can then create piping lines using the "Modeling > Piping Line..." command, as explained
in the online help.
A new empty local assembly is then created, and added to the parts folder, it will later contain
the elements of the piping line.
Sketches
When a piping line is created, a piping sketch is also created and added to the sketches
folder.
This special type of sketch allows you to create a wireframe skeleton representing the axes
of tubes that will make up the piping line, while displaying at the same time the outside shape
of the tubes and eldows of the future line (this may be switched off using the mode command
"3D Sketch > Modes > Show Tubes and Elbows").
The skeleton is made of the sketch segments, that can be created and modified like in a
normal spatial sketch.

The diameter of the tubes is the smallest available diameter in the selected tubes family,
greater than or equal to a specified minimal diameter.
Likewise, the thickness of the tubes (or elbows) is the smallest available thickness in the
selected tubes (or elbows) family, greater than or equal to a specified minimal thickness, for
the specified diameter.

It is possible to modify this minimal diameter or this minimal thickness by double-clicking on a

tube or an elbow and editing the dimension that is then shown (it may be hidden again by
double-clicking on the tube or elbow).
Elbow diameter and thickness
Tube diameter and thickness

The piping line's neutral fiber is displayed in a style that may be modified, it coincides with the
skeleton at the tubes, but not at the elbows.
Piping Line
Skeleton
Neutral Fiber

Blocks
It is often easiest to create a parallelepiped which vertices and edges will be used to support
the skeleton. This can be done using the "3D Sketch > Block..." command.I
Inserts
Once the piping line has been created, you can insert piping components through which the
flow passes. These piping inserts must be placed on the piping line skeleton and cut the piping
line.
To include them to perform the insertion, you need to edit the piping sketch and use the
"Insert..." contextual command as explained in the online help.
When choosing the insert, it is possible to only see the components codes that are compatible
with the diameter of the tube by checking "Filter codes" in the dialog.
If a component with a different diameter is used, the diameter of the connected tubes and
elbows will be automatically modified accordingly.
In particular, when a reducer is inserted, the tubes diameter will be modified at least on one
side.

Insert (reducer)
Small diameter Large diameter
Once the inserts have been created, their codes will be driven by the diameter of the tubes,
and if it is modified the code will be automatically changed to get the insert which is compatible
with the new diameter (if there are none in the family, it will become invalid).
Drafting
When drafting a piping line, you may use the isometric camera and make 3D dimensions.
Definitions
If the type of tube, elbow, or insert you want to use is unavailable in a standard library, you
have the option of defining new types, which will then be managed the same way.

These definitions should be placed in a library that can then be used in different projects. Also,
to keep from mixing everything up, it is recommended that you create a "Piping" folder with
"Tubes", "Elbows", and "Inserts" subfolders where you can store all of the definitions.
First, create a generic part to represent a parameterized tube, elbow, or insert. To do this,
make a new part document and give it the name of the type of tube, elbow, or insert.
Tubes
The modeled tube must have an entry frame and an exit frame (Z axes along the tube's axis,
toward the outside of the tube). It should also have a length set by a "l" parameter.
You then need to tell TopSolid that it is a tube whose function is derived from the "Tube"
function, such as the "Circular Tube" function, which requires referencing the "TopSolid
Mechanical" library that contains its definition. If there is no function for the type of tube you
want, you can define a new function that will derive from the "Tube" function ("Tools > Derived
Function..." command).
To provide a function, run the "Tools > Provide Function..." command and select the "Tube"
function.
You will then need to complete the function by editing each of its members (by selecting them
in the entities trees and using the "Edit..." command in the context menu), as follows:
• Entry frame: Select the entry frame.
• Exit frame: Select the exit frame.
• Length: Select the "l" parameter used for the length of the tube.
• Any additional parameters: diameter, thickness, etc.
You can also assign a material and a coating to the part. Then, when you use this type of tube,
created tubes will have the assigned material, and their physical properties will be calculated
(mass, center of mass, and moments of inertia).
You can also configure the description using the code, as explained in the "Families" chapter,
in order to manage the BOM.
Define one driver to be the "l" parameter that defines the length of the tube. Also define any
additional parameters defined in the supplied function (ex. the diameter "d" and the thickness
"t" in the case of the "Circular Tube" function).
You can then define as many codes as you want, using the other part parameters.
When inserting the tube, a longer tube will be automatically generated and then recut to the
right size.
Elbows
The modeled elbow must have an entry frame and an exit frame (same conventions as the
tube). There must also be an "a" parameter for the elbow's aperture angle and an "r"
parameter for its radius of curvature.
You then need to tell TopSolid that it is an elbow whose function is derived from the "Elbow"
function, such as the "Circular Elbow" function, which requires referencing the "TopSolid
Mechanical" library that contains its definition. If there is no function for the type of elbow you
want, you can define a new function that will derive from the "Elbow" function ("Tools > Derived
function..." command).
To provide a function, run the "Tools > Provide function..." command and select the "Elbow"
function.
in the entities trees and using the "Edit..." command in the context menu), as follows:
• Entry frame: Select the entry frame.

• Exit frame: Select the exit frame.

• Radius: Select the "l" parameter used for the length of the elbow.
• Arc: Select the "a" parameter used for the arc of the elbow.
• Any additional parameters: diameter, thickness, etc.
You can also assign a material and a coating to the part. Then, when you use this type of
elbow, created elbows will have the assigned material, and their physical properties will be
calculated (mass, center of mass, and moments of inertia).
Define one driver to be the "a" parameter that defines the arc of the elbow.
Next, add the "r" parameter to define the elbow's radius in the family catalog, along with any
additional parameters defined in the supplied function (ex. the diameter "d" and the thickness
"t" in the case of the "Circular Elbow" function).
parameters.
When inserting the elbow, an elbow with a larger arc will be automatically generated and then
recut to the right size.
Inserts
The modeled pipe insert must have two or more connection frames.
You then need to tell TopSolid that it is an insert whose function is derived from the "Insert"
function, such as the "Circular Insert" function, which requires referencing the "TopSolid
Mechanical" library that contains its definition. If there is no function for the type of tube you
want, you can define a new function that will derive from the "Insert" function ("Tools > Derived
function..." command).
To provide a function, run the "Tools > Provide Function..." command and select the "Insert"
function.
in the entities trees and using the "Edit..." command in the context menu).
You can also assign a material and a coating to the part. Then, when you use this type of
insert, created inserts will have the assigned material, and their physical properties will be
calculated (mass, center of mass, and moments of inertia).
Next, add the parameters defined in the function supplied in the family catalog.
parameters.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Materials
Materials

Materials TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
To create a realistic representation of parts, you must specify the material from which they are
made.
This will allow them to display more accurately (or realistically), and it will make it possible to
calculate their physically properties, such as their mass or their moments of inertia, which is
necessary to perform simulations.
The TopSolid mechanical library provides several materials by default, but it is also possible
for users to define their own materials.
This chapter explains how to create new materials (and coatings) that can be used in parts.
Parameters
As noted above, a material is defined using a "Material" document. You must start by creating
a new "Material" document on the "Advanced" tab in the document creation command.
Here you will see a form with several fields divided into groups, which must be filled out at
least partially.
Each field corresponds to a parameter, which you can also reach via the entity tree.
If you modify a parameter in the tree, the corresponding field is updated, and vice versa.
When a field is blank, it either has no corresponding setting or its value is < unspecified >.
Some rarely used parameters do not have a corresponding field, so you must go through the
entity tree to edit them.

Bill of Material
The first group to fill out has to do with the bill of material, or the names by which the material
will appear and the relative density for calculating the mass of the parts.
Name
Description
The material's description provided here (corresponding to the material's "Description"

parameter) is the "Material description" parameter in the part's parameters when this material
is assigned to it and the "Material description" property when a bill of material is made.
Note that the material name, or more specifically the material document name, may be
different than its description.
It is up to the user to establish rules for selecting material names and descriptions, or you can
simply refer to what was said in the "PDM" chapter:
• Name: The document name helps you identify it quickly. It should be very short because it
will be displayed in the project tree and in the tab of the document window.
• Description: The description can be longer. It is generally used to establish a bill of
material, so it should be specific or even a bit wordy.
The various part numbers, which generally correspond to the "Part number" field and appear
only in the entities tree parameters, are to be used as your organization has decided.
Hardness
The fields in the "Hardness" group are used for entering information about the hardness of
the material.
Elasticity
The fields in the "Elasticity" group are used for entering information about the elasticity of the
material.

Deformation
The different fields in the "Deformation" group are used for entering information about the
plastic deformation of the material.
Appearance
The "Appearance" group brings together all of the fields used for defining the material's visual
appearance when a realistic rendering is made of a piece using this material.
To make it easier to set the values, a preview is automatically generated and then updated
whenever a value is modified.
Materials that are not homogenous require a texture to be used in order to display correctly.
This method will be discussed later in the "Realistic Render Mode" chapter. Here, we will focus
only on homogenous materials, for which the "Texture" field must be left blank.
Of course, the first field to fill in is for the diffuse color, which is the color of the material,
independent of reflections. This is the material's "base" color.
Materials can be classified into two different categories, depending on how they reflect light.
Plastics reflect light without modifying it, while metals color the reflected light. Because of this,
you must select the desired behavior by adjusting the specularity type.
The specular shininess factor indicates how much light is reflected in relation to the
incidental light.

The specular spreading indicates how much light is actually reflected in relation to a perfect
reflection. The rougher the material's surface, the higher its specular spreading.
Spreading 2% Spreading 20%

The reflection coefficient indicates how much light is coming from nearby objects reflected
by the material. Unlike specular shininess, which relates to light reflection (primary lighting),
the reflection coefficient relates to object reflection (secondary lighting).
The transparency coefficient indicates how much light is passing through the material.
The refractive index measures the deviation of light rays as they pass through a transparent
material. If this field is not filled in, the material does not produce any refractive effect.
No refraction Refractive index 1.5
Except for mirrors, reflective materials do not reflect light perfectly. The surface can give the
material a matte effect.

The reflection spreading angle indicates that the light is reflected not just in one direction but
in a general direction with an angular dispersion.
Perfect reflection Reflection with dispersion
The reflection spreading angle is usually small (a few degrees) because the reflection blurs
such that the effect is no longer visible (diffusing material) beyond a certain value.
Perfect reflection Spreading angle 3°

When there is refraction, the rays can also be refracted in a general direction. It is therefore
also possible to have a refraction spreading angle. This creates a translucence effect.
Perfect refraction Spreading angle 3°
The Fresnel Reflection is a physical effect that describes how dielectric materials such as
glass and plastic become totally reflective for grazing incidence rays. So, a transparent
window becomes more reflective when viewed from the front, and less transparent when
viewed from an angle.
The Fresnel Reflection option allows you simulate this effect for two types of material.
When the material is transparent with a reflection coefficient, such as glass, the Fresnel
Reflection tends to darken the outline of objects.
Without Fresnel Reflection With Fresnel Reflection

When the material is opaque with a reflection coefficient, the reflection is zero from the front of
the object but increases to the value specified by the object outline.
Opaque Material Opaque Material Detail
Coatings
As with materials, you can define coatings.
Coating is somewhat like a material that can only be applied to the surface of a part, which is
why it is defined in a similar way.
Simply create a "Coating" document instead of a "Material" document. So start by creating a
new "Coating" document on the "Advanced" tab in the document creation command.
Some material parameters are not required for coating, so there are fewer parameters to set.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Realistic Rendering
Realistic Rendering

Realistic Rendering TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
TopSolid lets you produce photorealistic quality images of parts and assemblies.
This makes it possible to show the result of a design without having to actually manufacture a
prototype, saving both time and money.
This chapter explains how to accomplish this and which commands are used.
Lights
By default, the scene is lit with lighting that is adapted to the design (called work lighting). It is
possible to define lighting (called realistic lighting) that is tailored to the realistic image
computation. There are various types of lighting available for this.
Ambient lighting is the lighting that comes from all directions. This makes it possible to avoid
having any completely black shadowed area.
However, the more ambient lighting there is, the less contrast there will be in the image.
A point light shines with the same intensity in all directions. It is like a light bulb.
A directional light comes from a source at infinity and lights with an infinite reach in a single
direction. Sunlight is similar to directional light.
A beam light also lights in a single direction, but it comes from a source located in the space.
The projector lights the scene cylindrically. It is characterized by its outer light ray, beyond
which it no longer lights, and its inner light ray, which defines the area in which the light
intensity is highest. This intensity decreases until it reaches zero with its outer light ray.
A spot light emits light in a cone around a given direction from a given point. The light intensity
decreases between the spot direction and the cutoff angle. The half-intensity angle defines the
angle at which the light intensity is half of the maximum intensity.
The sky light simulates both direct sunlight and the ambient radiation emitted by the sky. This
radiation is much more diffused than other types of light and provides much softer lighting.
Direct Light Sky Light
Sky light is particularly useful for creating interior design renderings.

Interior Rendering with Sky Light
The "Visualization > Realistic Lighting" allows you to toggle between work lighting and realistic
lighting, i.e. all of the lighting created.
Shadows
The way in which a light projects shadows can be configured for each point light, beam light,
and spot light in the "Shadow" section of its editing dialog.
The "None" mode disables the projection of a shadow.
The "Shadow Map" mode uses a quick method to calculate shadows. The shadows are
approximate, and their quality degrades if you greatly enlarge the shadow. This mode is
usually sufficient for most situations.
The "Shadow Map Blur" parameter softens the edge of the shadow to avoid "hard" shadows.
The technique basically consists of blurring the shadow, which works very quickly but is not
realistic.
The "Ray-traced" mode calculates the shadows exactly. The computing time is longer than
with shadow maps.
Because the rays are propagated in a straight line, a point light will always project a "hard"
shadow. In reality, shadows are softened due to the spatial spread of the light source. In
particular, a shadow is normally hard around its source and then softens as it expands. This
effect can be accurately simulated by defining the geometry of the light source. There are
various geometries available. For example, a segment can simulate a neon tube, and a
rectangle can simulate a row of neon tubes.
The "Samples" parameter measures the number of values that will be calculated to simulate a
non-point light. The higher the value of this parameter and the more precise its result, the

longer the computing will take. The default value (24) is a good compromise between
accuracy and computing time.
Shadow map without blur Shadow map with blur Ray-traced
It is also possible to define a shadow color other than black. You may want, for example, to
use a dark gray color to avoid making the shadows too dark, without having to increase the
ambient lighting too much (which degrades the contrast of the image).
Cameras
Cameras allow you to define the scene's point of view. In realistic rendering, people often use
a perspective with a vanishing point, called a conical perspective, which produces an image
in the same way as a camera.
To create such a camera, you should use the "Visualization > Cameras > Camera by 2 Points"
command. You also need to specify where the camera is located, the focal point, and the
camera's vertical direction. (You can rotate the camera around its line of sight.)
When using a conical perspective, you should also assign the angle of view. This angle
measures the area that the camera lens will be able to capture. A value between 30° and 40°
produces realistic results.
A camera is applied to a view by dragging it to the view from the "Cameras" folder in the entity
tree.
Textures
Textures allow you to define the aspect of a material or coating when it is not uniform. When
defining a material or coating, you can assign it a texture that will take precedence over its
color.
Textures are divided into categories according to their aspect type. The orientation of a texture
on a part is defined by the positioning of its fibers ("Tools > Fibers..." command).
"Planar" Category
This category is for when an image is applied to the object on a projection plane.
The image must be provided as a bitmap file. This file is no longer necessary once the texture
has been created, because the image is stored in the texture document.
In addition, you have to define a "physical" dimension to the image by indicating its actual
width. (The height is derived from the width and the image format.)
"Auto-axes" Category
This category is for when an image is applied to the object in three orthogonal directions in
order to minimize image deformations.
This category's parameters are similar to the parameters for the "Planar" category.

"Wood" Category
This category is used to represent a wooden material. There are various parameters available
to set the color and aspect of the rings.
"Raised" Category
This category allows you to achieve an embossed aspect from an image in order to represent
the height of the unevenness. This category's parameters are similar to the parameters for the
"Planar" category.
"Decal" Category
This category is for when an image is applied to the object on an existing material. Also, this
category handles image cropping by means of a transparent color.
"Decal" textures can only be used in the "Shape > Other Operations > Decal" command for
parts.
"Redway" Category
This category is for the textures supplied in the TopSolid texture library. These are textures
with various effects. Each texture includes specific settings that are accessed in the material
or coating configuration that uses the texture type.
Environments
When using reflective materials (with a non-zero reflection coefficient), the computed image
may be quite dull if the scene is not surrounded by objects that will give off reflections. In
reality, the scene is always located in an environment (natural, industrial, architectural, etc.).

It would be a long and costly process to completely model an environment for the sole purpose
of improving the rendered image. It is possible to use an environment document using images
to represent a realistic environment that will be reflected in the scene.
To create a new environment document, you need to have a special file containing images that
represent the environment in all directions (DDS environment file, horizontal cross, vertical
cross or spheremap bitmap file).
If you do not have this type of file (which is likely the case), TopSolid provides several standard
environment documents in the TopSolid mechanical library. Simply drag over this environment
document and drop it on the viewed document to make the environment active in the scene.
A document may include several environments, but only one can be active. A document's
environments are stored in the entity tree in the "Environments" folder. An environment is
activated through its contextual menu.
You can make the environment visible in the background by using the "Visualization >
Background Environment" command. It is absolutely necessary for the graphic view to be in
realistic rendering mode with a conical perspective camera so that the environment displays
correctly.
The image can also be calculated with the background environment by selecting the
"Environment" option in the "Background" field.
Background
You can use a screen background image. The "Visualization > Background" command allows
you to import a bitmap image and display it in the background when the graphic view is in
realistic rendering mode.
Unlike the environment background, the screen background image remains fixed, regardless
of the camera orientation.

Renderings
There are several rendering modes available from which to choose the most appropriate
display for working effectively. Three rendering mode categories are available:
• Shaded render modes: Parts are shown with their design colors.
• Wireframe render modes: Only the edges of parts are shown.
• Realistic render modes: Parts are shown with their materials and coatings.
Realistic rendering modes with effects also show shadows in real time. The quality of these
shadows is not as good as in a computed image so that the software can continue to perform
well enough to work.
The rendering modes also vary according to how they display hidden edges: visible, dotted, or
hidden.
Additionally, the striped rending mode can show the curvature of surfaces using a special
lighting.

Photorealistic Rendering
The "Visualization > Realistic Rendering..." command allows you to produce photorealistic
images.
Global Options
The view to compute specifies the view whose camera orientation will be used as a reference
when computing the image.
The "Background" option allows you to select which background to use for the photorealistic
rendering:
• White: The image background is solid white.
• Environment: The environment is displayed in the background.
• Background: The current background is used (gradient or background image).
• Black: The image background is solid black.
• Transparent: The image background is transparent in formats that support it (all except
JPEG).
The antialiasing level can improve the quality of the image by smoothing the pixels along the
edges to avoid a staircasing effect.
The higher the level of antialiasing, the longer it takes to compute.
Without antialiasing With antialiasing
The "Lighting Accuracy" option improves the quality of the rendering by reducing the noise
produced by extensive lighting and material reflection. The improvement is similar to the
improvement obtained by increasing the antialiasing, but much faster.

Accuracy 10% Accuracy 100%
The "Simplified Rendering" option allows an image to be generated by disabling the

rendering options that take a lot of time:
• Extended lights are replaced with point lights.
• The parameters covering the spread of the reflection and refraction are disabled.
This option can be checked to quickly set the other parameters.
The "Global Illumination" option allows you to accurately simulate the ambient light reflected
by the scene itself, in addition to the direct light coming from light sources.
In a standard computed image, an area that is not directly lit by a light is black. In reality, this
area receives light reflected back from the walls and objects in the scene. Global illumination
(also called radiosity) takes this effect into account and prevents the image from having unlit
areas.
This option is particularly useful for interior design and architecture images.
Without Global Illumination With Global Illumination
The "Global Illumination Accuracy" improves the global illumination calculation by taking
into account small scene details. Generally, the default value (15%) is sufficient.
Display
The "Display" section allows a preview image to be generated in a separate window.
Using the popup menu from this window, you can immediately save the generated image, and
touch up the image to lighten or darken it without having to recalculate the entire image.

Save
The "Save" section saves an image to a file. There are various standard formats available:
BMP, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, OpenEXR and RadianceHDR. A quality parameter is available for
setting the compression of the JPEG format.
The "Transparent Background" option allows you store information in the image file to help
with lifting the image from the background. Image-processing software can use this
information to superimpose the resulting image onto a background image. Only the JPEG
format does not support this option.
The "Open Image" option allows the image to be opened using the associated program.
The "Background Task" option has the rendering server calculate the rendering in a
background task, which frees up TopSolid so that you can continue working while the image is
calculated (see the rendering server section).
Advanced
The "Advanced" section contains rendering options. The higher these parameters are set, the
higher the image quality will be, at the expense of computing time.
The recursion depth indicates the maximum number of rebounds of the rays used for
computing the effects (reflexion, refraction, shadows and transparency).
The shadow map depth is similar to the shadow depth, but it applies to the light whose
shadow is calculated by shadow map (and not by sending rays, as in the shadow depth
parameter).
The ray cutoff indicates the minimum light intensity transported by a ray (reflected or
refracted). If a ray's intensity is less than this threshold, it will not be processed in order to
increase the image computation.
The "High Dynamic Range" option is used to handle scenes whose final lighting is greater
than 100% (which can happen if it contains a light with an intensity higher than 100% or
several lights whose sum exceeds 100%). This is actually supported, but because graphics
cards are optimized to process a pixel intensity of no more than 100%, default processing
limits the light intensity to 100%. The result is that a reflection, for example, is computed from
an intensity that is lower than in reality.
The "High Dynamic Range" option makes it possible to go beyond this limitation at the
expense of computing time. (On the most recent graphics cards, this mode is natively
supported and has little impact on computing time.)
In the following example, the white light above shines with a light intensity of 300%. The blue
spherical reflector below has a reflection coefficient of 20%. Without the "High Dynamic
Range" option, the reflection is produced from rays that are limited to 100%, so it cannot
exceed 100% x 20% = 20%. With the "High Dynamic Range" option, the reflection receives
rays with an intensity of 300% and can therefore reach 300% x 20% = 60%.

High dynamic range deactivated High dynamic range activated
The "Single Bounce Global Illumination" option speeds up the global illumination
calculation by only taking into account one light distribution depth level per scene. When this
option is enabled, the light diffused by the scene is taken into account, but not the light diffused
by an object that is lit by the diffused light.
Generally, this light does not create problems, except when the scene is lit by indirect light,
such as when using wall plates.
Level Unlimited
Rendering Server
The rendering server calculates photorealistic images while allowing the user to continue to
work with TopSolid. The rendering server starts automatically when an image calculation is
requested with the "Background Task" option.
When the rendering server is launched, its icon appears in the Windows taskbar. Mouse over
this icon to display the server status. If an image is being calculated, the calculation progress
state is shown.

Rendering server icon
When the image calculation is complete, a notification displays on the rendering server's icon.
Simply click this notification to open the image that has just been calculated.
Right-click the icon to pause or resume the current calculation and to set up the rendering
server.
Double-click the icon to display, reorder, or delete the list of current calculations or to display
the history of calculated images. Open the calculated images by double-clicking them.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Analysis
Analysis

Analysis TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
The "TopSolid'Fea" add-in is to help users verify that their design functions properly before
manufacturing a prototype. It is a powerful tool to reduce design costs and lead time and
increase the performance and reliability of mechanical systems.
The purpose of this chapter is to introduce how to analyze structures with finite elements in
TopSolid'Fea. This application is intended for users who do not necessarily have a high level
of knowledge in finite elements. Its intuitive interface guides them along in establishing the
model for analysis. The analysis can be conducted on a single part designed in a part
document, or on an assembly of parts in an assembly document.
The same application has a post-processing tool. It allows users to see the different results
from the analysis. These results are generated and stored in a result document.
All of the analyses discussed here assume that the material is homogeneous, isotropic and
the domain of validity for the results is limited to the elastic domain.
Caution: Calculation results may be indicative of or affected by errors (e.g. because its
approximations cause it to fall outside the domain of validity). When working with critical
products, you must always verify them with another software program. (If both give the same
result, it is probably accurate.) In addition, even if the result is correct, it is possible that
simplifications made when you modeled the product are not verified in reality. You should
always test the final product in real (or even extreme) situations before making it available to
the user risk-free.
Preparation
An analysis preparation document includes stages, listed here in chronological order:
• Modeling Stage: This stage includes the operation to include the part or assembly
document to analyze.
• Simplification Stage: This stage includes the different operations for simplifying the
geometry.
• Definition Stage: This stage includes the different operations for developing a finite
element model, or more specifically, the operations to manage the boundary and loading
conditions, connections, analyses and use of materials.
• Meshing Stage: This stage includes the different operations related to the meshing of
parts, which serves as the analysis model.
Analysis
There are three types of analyses in TopSolid'Fea:
• Linear Static Analysis: This allows a mechanical structure to be sized based on a linear
static study. Stresses are static and the structure's mass is not taken into account.
• Modal Analysis: This allows you to calculate the first modes of vibration of a mechanical
structure. Only the structure's stiffness and mass are included in the calculation. Stresses
are not taken into account.
• Buckling Analysis: This allows you to calculate the first buckling modes of a mechanical
structure. It first requires a static analysis to be defined.
It is possible to produce multiple analyses within a single analysis preparation document. To
switch from one analysis to another, just make it current by selecting the "Make Current"
command in the entities tree. When applying a loading or boundary condition, it will be
produced in the current analysis.

Inclusion
TopSolid'Fea is capable of conducting a structural analysis with finite elements on a single part
or assembly of parts. If you are analyzing a part, include a part document in the analysis
preparation document. Otherwise, include the assembly document. The user can include
whatever representation he chooses, and may even create a representation specifically for the
analysis and then insert it in the analysis preparation document.
Wizard
The wizard helps ensure the validity of an analysis (e.g. the materials are well-defined, the
boundary conditions are applied). It also allows direct access to a menu command, and
enables you to define a boundary or loading condition, or even to mesh all of the unmeshed
parts. This tool can be launched from the "Analysis > Wizard…" menu.
Materials
The material is defined in the part document. All three fields below must be populated:
• Young's Modulus.
• Poisson's Ratio.
• Density.
This data is required to properly solve the analysis.
Contacts
The contact areas between the different parts of an assembly are automatically detected. The
operation that automatically detects these contact areas takes place right after including an
assembly document in the analysis preparation document.
These contacts, called "automatics", are added to the contacts folder in the entities tree and
are active by default. The user can turn off a contact entity with the right mouse button. Only
the active contact entities will be used in the analysis.
It is also possible to manually define a contact entity with the "Analysis > Contact…" menu
command.
The contact is defined between master faces and slave faces.

Master faces are those that impose the condition of contact. Those that are subjected to the
condition are slave faces.
The mesh size of the master surface must be larger than that of the slave face. Since this
condition is not automatically handled by the system, the user should make sure the mesh
sizes are properly set during the meshing operation.
The slave nodes cannot penetrate the master face, but the master nodes can penetrate into
the slave face.
This command offers the three most used types of contacts:

• Contact with friction.
• Contact without friction.
• Welded contact.
The contact between master faces and slave faces can be defined with or without friction. If
the contact is considered to be with friction, the friction coefficient must be defined. The friction
coefficient, for example, between steel/steel is around 0.2.
The welded contact can make the mesh compatible between the two contact faces. The two
faces are considered linked and no movement is possible between them.
If the user defines a contact with or without friction, the master contact faces are considered
rigid, which means that the faces cannot be distorted.

Boundary Conditions
To begin solving an analysis, a number of boundary conditions must be imposed. These are
applied directly on the geometry and not on the mesh. The following are the possible boundary
conditions you can apply:
• Rigid: The displacements and rotations of all rigid nodes are zero.
• Surface Sliding: The displacement of a face along normal is zero.
• Imposed Displacement: The displacement of an edge or face can be imposed (zero or
not zero) along a direction or a frame.
• Elastic Support: Stiffness between an edge or a face and the body is defined along a
direction or frame.
You can only begin to solve an analysis if the geometries are properly blocked. A massive
single part requires blocking along the three degrees of freedom of an orthonormal frame.
Loads
Different loads can be applied for a static analysis:
• Uniform Pressure.
• Hydrostatic Pressure.
• Surface Stress: Can be defined along a direction or frame.
• Acceleration.
• Centrifugal Force.
All of these loads are available either from the "Analysis" menu or the wizard.
Meshes
Two easy and user-friendly meshes are available in TopSolid'Fea:
• Automatic Mesh: The advantage of this mesh is the consistency of the elements it
generates. It generates triangular surface meshes according to the size specified by the
user. The volume is then filled with quadratic tetrahedral elements using a tetrahedral
volumetric mesh.

• Face by Face Mesh: Its advantage is to impose local refinement on a part of the geometry,
or else select a type of local mesh. It generates quadratic triangular elements, and the
volume is filled with tetrahedral elements. The target size of elements is specified by the
user. The elements created cannot be below the minimum imposed size. Size tolerance
allows all edges smaller than this value to be ignored.
The user often has to refine the mesh in areas with large amounts of stress in order to find out
the true stress values.
TopSolid'Fea provides functionality to refine a mesh locally. Similarly, to improve the quality of
meshes locally, the "Meshing > Local Mesher" may be effective in some cases.
There are several methods for this purpose.
For an assembly, only the face by face mesh is available. All of the unmeshed parts may be
sectioned and meshed at the same time. The element size is automatically calculated for each
part depending on its size. You can always edit a mesh to change these parameters.

Mesh Quality
The "Meshing > Mesh Quality…" command determines the quality of the mesh based on the
solver's two most important convergence criteria: the Jacobian and the minimum angle. These
two criteria correspond to the highly distorted elements created during the meshing stage. If
the quality of an element for one of these two criteria is poor, it could lead to discrepancies in
the solver or significant degrading of the quality of the results. Elements of poor quality can be
either displayed or viewed graphically.
Results
The solution of an analysis creates a new document called an analysis result document. It
consists of two stages, listed here in chronological order:
• Solving Stage: This stage includes the operation for solving the analysis.
• Results Stage: This stage includes the operation for managing the different results from
the analysis.
Once the analysis is solved, you would generally visualize the different calculated fields. The
commands for accessing these fields are not always active and vary depending on the type of
analysis solved. These results include:
• Stresses: These are only active if a static analysis is involved. They are used in particular
to confirm the assumption that the calculation is only valid in the elastic domain. The user
can visualize different important stress types, Von Mises stresses, Tresca stresses or
principal stresses. All of these stresses are available from the "Results > Results from
Stresses…" menu.
• Displacements: These are also only active if a static analysis is involved. Displacements
are usually visualized to find out their order of magnitude. The calculation is only valid if
they are still weak after deformation. They can be visualized along a direction, in a plane of
the principal frame or by standard means. They are available from the "Results > Results
from Displacements…" menu.
• Natural Frequencies: These are only active if a modal analysis is involved. The user can
analyze the natural frequencies and the mode shapes. This command is available from the
"Results > Natural Frequencies…" menu.
• Load Factors: These are only active if a buckling analysis is involved. The user can
analyze these load factors and the mode shapes. This command is available from the
"Results > Load Factors…" menu.
• Contact Pressures: These are active only if a static analysis is involved on an assembly.
They allow the user to visualize the pressure in areas where there was actual contact.
The "Result > Scale Factor" command multiplies a field result by a scale factor in order to
amplify the result and zoom in on the distorted geometry.
Reports
After performing a calculation, a report often needs to be generated.
This report summarizes all the information pertaining to the calculation procedure and the
different results obtained.
Three predefined report templates are available in the TopSolid library, depending on the type
of analysis studied (static, modal or buckling). It is also possible to customize your own report
either based on an existing report template or by creating a new report document and
selecting "Results From Analysis" as the document type.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Split Blocks
Split Blocks

Split Blocks TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
This chapter introduces you to the “TopSolid’Split” module. This module allows you to create
core and cavity block splits, and also sub-inserts without any consideration to the final use of
these blocks (ie. casting, injection molding, prototyping …).
To be able to create a final file that contains your split blocks, we must first go through a few
stages. First, you must recover a PDD (Part Data Definition) designed on an external CAD
system or a part, or an assembly done in TopSolid.
You can prepare the data and Include it in a split blocks document where the shrinkage factor
will be managed automatically. Then you would use it to define the parting edges. There are
some specific tools available to help you with this task. Next, you will design the parting
surfaces and the shut off surfaces. You can even create your insert(s) if you need them to
finalize your design. As you will see, the design process is a “step by step” process; each
stage is available only if the previous one has been completed.
In the end, TopSolid’Split will provide you an assembly document that you can use in any way
that you can imagine. This can be the starting point of your future tooling design.
PDD Import and Preparation
Part and Insert

The part to inject must be a solid shape that comes from an external CAD system, or a shape
directly created in TopSolid’Design. In TopSolid’Split, you can manage one or more molded
shapes as parts to inject. You can also consider insert shapes which are parts added to the
molded geometries to get the final shape.
Model Preparation
Maybe there are some problems with the data you received and these problems could hold
you back from completing your design (non-drafted part, no radius applied, lacks of ribs,

translation process that modified some surfaces…). TopSolid offers an arsenal of tools to help
provide solutions too many of these types of problems:
• Analysis tools: Available from “Tools > Analyses…”, these functions will help you to
understand the selected geometries. For example, “Tools > Analyses> Analyze Face Type”
allows you to visually check a parts topology with a surface colorization map. Like this, you
get information which helps you to determine if it is necessary to simplify a part.
• Heal tools: A wizard which works on shapes exists in TopSolid to help you to “fix” your
PDD. It is available in the “Surface > Heal” section. Please note that all of the different
healing tools are available in a standalone mode, if you do not want to use the full wizard.
Like this you can run Check geometry, start the Simplify operation or Clean data
commands independently. We will speak about these functions later in this chapter.
• Creation tools: Of course, all the TopSolid creation tools are available: from Sketch to
shape creation, you can of course use all our tools to get a good design. You can work in a
Part document or in an In-place creation context if you are managing an Assembly.
Checking and Simplification

The Check geometry function is very important in your design process, especially when you
work with external data. Simplify would also be useful to reduce your file size and lighten your
geometries. The Simplify function will convert, at a given tolerance, complex entities (B-
Spline surfaces or curves...) to more simple elements (planes, cylinders, conical shapes, lines,
circles…). Simplifying your geometry makes it easier and faster to work with it. It also will
reduce the software’s computation time as well. All of this will result in you achieving your
design more quickly.
Position
You must include your molded shapes and your potential Inserts, which come from a part and/
or an assembly file in a split blocks document. Maybe those elements were not designed in a
molding position (e.g., automotive designed parts) so first, (prior to including your molded
shapes in the split blocks document) you must create on those designs a molding frame. You
can do that by using the “Tools > Frames” function. Once finished, right click on this new

frame, and choose “Other > Publish frame” to allow its later use during the inclusion in the split
blocks document.
Preparation Stage
Please refer to the “Operations > Stages” chapter for further information about how to manage
stages in TopSolid.
In a split blocks document, the stages are dedicated to the work of creating split blocks.
Everything follows the stage philosophy. Each time you start a new function, TopSolid
automatically switches to the dedicated stage. Of course you can handle your stages manually
at any time in your current design.
Inclusion
You can include your shape(s) in to a split blocks document in two ways. It does not matter if
you use one method or the other one. There is no difference for the end result.
• By New Document: Ask for the creation of a Split Blocks document. Once done, you will
be able to Include your data in this file, or drag-n-drop them directly from the project tree. If
the automatic positioning done by the software is not suitable for you, you can edit and
modify it according to your needs. Then you have to go to the next step, the definition of the
molded shapes, and the assigning of insert shapes (if you have this kind of element in your
design.)
• In Contextual mode: In the project tree, or from the part or assembly tab, “right click” and
ask for the creation of a split blocks document. We recommend that you work this way,
because a wizard will help you to move through the TopSolid’Split functions.

Molded Shapes
You can manage more than one shape in your design. In that case, you must indicate to the
software which parts to handle as molded shapes. Many shapes can be defined according to
your molding needs (multi-material, over molding, multi cavities…). For example, if you want
to manage a two cavity split, you will have to define two molded shapes.

Insert Shapes
Sometimes, you have to manage insert shapes. You must consider them in order to get your
final and real part, but they are not molded shapes. They could be metal inserts, preformed
skeleton, frame, over-molded elements…
Shrinkage
When you apply shrinkage to a molded shape, you set the parameters of a scaling operation
which allows getting the correct shape for the split blocks. As a result, the shape used for the
creation of the split blocks is bigger than the starting data.
Once having selected the molded shape to apply the shrinkage too, you choose its reference
frame. It is allowed to select a previously published frame, created in the part document. Then
you set the shrinkage values according to three methods:
• Automatic: If the shrinkage field has been filled in the material definition (“Material >
Advanced”), and of course this material applied to the part, then you can recover this
information automatically.

• Global: In this case, you set only one value, to apply a global scaling according to the three
main axis’ X, Y and Z of the previously selected frame. The value can be managed 3 ways:
E.g., global shrinkage factor of 2% :

‰ (Per mille) : Rarely used, you enter in the dialog field 0.2
% (Percent) : type 2
u (Unit) : type 1.02
Unit modification is allowed at any time just by clicking the expected button. TopSolid’Split
converts your value to the selected unit.
Differential: It works like the global shrinkage factor, but it is possible to set specific shrink
factors per axis. The unit management works the same as explained before.

Parting Stage
Shape To Split
Once you have defined the molded shapes, your insert shapes and the shrink factor, you must
create the shapes to split. This shape is used to define correctly the parting edges. With this
new shape, you will be able to select an edge path shared by the molded shape and the Insert
shapes. As those entities are defined as only one shape to split, it is easy to detect the parting
edges. This shape is also used during the stock size computation. More than one shape to
split can be defined in the same split blocks document.
Please note that in some cases you will have to do some work on insert shapes, (E.g.
transformations, thicken operation, positioning…) to consider correctly the shrinkage factor
applied only on the molded shape, before you can move on to the definition of the shape to
split.
Stock
Stock is the base shape that will be trimmed during the real split operation by the parting
surfaces and the shape to split faces. In this step, you are setting the type of shape to use and
their dimensions:
• Block
• Cylinder
The block and cylinder stock shapes are centered and aligned on the frame defined during the
creation of the shape to split. An “Automatic” mode exists for these two kinds of shapes. A
margin value, defined in “Tools > Options > Split Blocks > Stock” is added to the computed
shapes to split the enclosing shape.
• User: allows you to select and assign a solid shape as the stock to manage.
Design planes, useful for the parting surfaces creation, are automatically generated at the
stock creation. You can visualize them, manage their extra length and set the way to update
them in the “Advanced Options”.

A dynamic preview is also available to let you check your settings. Moreover, you can play with
the “handles” directly displayed on screen to modify your stock shape dimensions.
As your stock shape is unique, you can edit it by clicking on its icon again. You can also edit
from the operations tree, by a “right-click” on the stock and choosing “Edit” from the contextual
menu.
Candidate Edges
TopSolid offers some helpful tools to define your parting edges. One of the best is called
candidate edges detection. It is very easy to use as well. Just select the work shape to split
and indicate the mold pull direction. As you would expect, a candidate parting edge could only
be applied on a shape edge. According to the existing part edges, TopSolid will automatically
detect the potential parting edges. These detected parting edges are displayed as yellow
curves by default. To move to the next step in the wizard, just select the blue arrow. Once the
first detection is validated, an associated operation is created in the operation tree. If you want
to change this detection, you can edit it in the tree. You can also start a new detection,
according to another direction. This can be helpful in determining parting edges for side
actions.
In some cases, it might be useful to create some operations on the shape to split. This is
allowed, but to maintain the correct update of the already computed candidate parting edges,
you must move the insertion cursor below the candidate parting edge operation, create your
new operations (imprint, radius, chamfer, hole…) and then return the cursor at its initial
position. The update will be done when the candidate parting edge operation has been
recalculated. The candidate edges detection is an optional process. You can, after the shape
to split definition, go directly to the parting edges creation if you prefer.

Parting Edges
Your parting path is defined by parting edges. These edges are the ones that will support
your parting surfaces and shut off surfaces. So you know a parting edge can only be applied
on a shape to splits edge. (So if you need to put a parting line on it, be sure to define it as a
part to split properly first). And as mentioned in the previous section, it is not mandatory to use
the candidate edges function first.
Once you have selected the shape to split, TopSolid will propose you the most appropriate
parting path according to the picked position. A filter allows detecting only candidate edges.
Selected edges are displayed in the preview color attribute, and are displayed in the selected
edges list. To remove an already selected edge, delete it from the list (Windows tool selection,
then DEL) or simply select it again in the graphic area.
Markers, displayed as “balls”, allow you to know where the Parting path is not continuous. The
goal is to get a “closed” path, but you can stop the function even if this patch is still “open”. Like
this you can validate an “open” status, stop the function and edit it to finalize the path later.

You can create / validate your parting edges path in any order. TopSolid will sort the different
edges for you, to compute the correct result.
The validated parting edges are displayed in green. The checking of your design is done with
a “real time” automatic result. If your parting edges definition is good, it means that the parting
shells can be created. With this correct result, TopSolid will automatically apply the appropriate
colors to the different shells, according to the graphic settings you can find in “Tools > Options
> Split Blocks > Colors”.

Insert Surfaces
TopSolid’Split does not just create core and cavity blocks. With the use of TopSolid’Split, it is
also possible to directly create insert blocks that can make manufacturing your part even
easier. There are 3 ways to design them:
• On Profiles or Loops: You can select an existing sketch, or a loop directly on the 3D
model. Then you set the limit type to apply (length, point, mold block plane, plane), the
main direction of the new insert (it can be determined automatically), a preview becomes
available to help you visualize your new insert, the parting edges and the new surfaces that
will be created after validation.
• On Faces: you select a face, or a group of tangent faces directly on the 3D model. These
faces are the ones in contact with the new insert. Then you set the limit type to apply
(length, point, mold block plane, plane), and the main direction of the new insert (it can be
determined automatically). Then a preview becomes available to help you visualize your
new insert, the parting edges and the new surfaces that will be created after validation.

• On Shape: You can also use a previously created solid shape to guide the creation of a
new insert. Then you set the limit type to apply (length, point, mold block plane, plane), and
the main direction of the new insert (it can be determined automatically). Then a preview
becomes available to help you visualize your new insert, the parting edges and the new
surfaces that will be created after validation.

Shut Off Surfaces

Shut off surfaces are created according to the previously computed parting edges. There are
three ways to use this function:
• On Shape: Select the shape to manage. TopSolid analyzes all the parting edges which can
be used to create shut off surfaces. You can select some parting edges to ignore as well.

• On Face: Start by selecting the face directly on the 3D model that you wish to use. TopSolid
analyzes all of the parting edges which can be used to create shut off surfaces. You can
choose to ignore some unnecessary edges if needed. Also, it is possible to create them in
“Extend” or “Fill” mode. During this, you can consider only the “Internal” edges, or only the
“Complete parting edges”.
• On Edges: Start by selecting the face directly on the 3D model that you wish to use. Next
select an edge of a parting line to use. TopSolid will then analyze all of the parting edges
that can be used to create shut off surfaces. Also it is possible to create them in “Extend” or
“Fill” mode. During this, you can consider only the “Internal” edges, or only the “Complete
parting edges”.

Parting Surface
You can create your external parting surfaces according to the previously created parting
edges, or directly from edges picked on the 3D model. An option exists to enable the selection
of all the edges or only the already validated Parting edges. There are 3 ways to use this
function.
• Extension: Begin by selecting an edge to start on. Next select an edge to end on. TopSolid
will automatically chain the parting edges between the start and end edge, (an option exists
to “Reverse” the direction if needed) and creates the extended surface related to your
selection. Then you can set the direction of the extension, (which can be determined
automatically or manually), followed by the limit type to apply (length, point, mold block
plane, plane)). A preview will help you visualize what the surface will look like prior to the
creation of it. You can also manage the surface’s lateral extension, at both the start and the
end of the external surface (by the dialog box, or with “double-click” on the handles on
screen).

• Lofted Without Guide: You begin by selecting a start edge, and finish by selecting an end
edge. TopSolid will then create a “ruled” surface between your selections. There are some
additional “Closing” modes that help to manage open ended surfaces.
• Lofted With Guides: This mode is like the merger of the two previous methodologies. You
begin by defining the guide curve. Start by selecting the staring edge and finish by selecting
the ending edge. Next you select the start profile and the end profile. (Typically edges of
other parting surfaces).
Miscellaneous Surfaces
TopSolid’Split offers some very automated and powerful surfacing tools to help speed up the
process of creating splits. However it is important to know that you can always use all of
TopSolid’s native surfacing tools as well. You can gain access to them from the “Surface” tab
at the top of the screen. If you use any of the standard surfacing tools, you will need to include
the manually created surfaces into the Parting Surfaces Set. There are a few ways to achieve
this:
• Holding the Control key down, select all of the manually created surfaces. Next right
mouse click, and choose “Add in the Parting surfaces set” from the contextual menu.
• In the Entities tree, you can drag-n-drop your manually created surfaces into the “Parting
Surface Set” as well
Modeling Stage
Parting Shells
Once you have completed the parting design, you can launch the Parting shells function. This
operation allows:

• To Control that the different parting elements (parting edges, Surfaces) are suitable for the
next step. If the different elements match correctly, you can proceed. If not, you will have
internal boundary edges in your shells. They are displayed in the error color, if your result is
wrong. They are there to help you determine what the problem might be. It could be as
simple as a gap, or an overlap.
• To Verify that the resulting shells are as you had planned. An “Opening” slider allows you
to simulate the shells opening movement. The movement is by default global, but you can
select one of the shells in the list to animate it separately as well.
To create the parting shells, you must validate this operation. This is a required step before
you can make the actual split blocks. If you make a change to the previous operations,
(parting lines, parting surfaces…), you will need to start this function again so that your shells
may be recomputed.
Parting Shapes
The parting shapes function will create all of the local blocks based on the accumulation of
your parting lines, surfaces, stock definition and, of course, the molded part. The real shapes
are created after you validate the function. If a design change happens, just start the function
again to re-compute the blocks.

Core Cavity Blocks

The core cavity blocks function is used to generate the end assembly file that is automatically
adapted to the PDM nature of TopSolid 7. This assembly file will contain all of the individual
parts of the split assembly (one part per file). We also generate the 3d model of the part to
mold, with shrink, and include it in this final end structure assembly. What you do with this
assembly from here is completely up to you!
Design Management
Classification
Like everything else in TopSolid 7, the different parting elements are automatically managed in
the entities tree. They are included based on a preordered classification which is not possible
to modify. It is important to understand that these predefined system sets are not
customizable. They are created when you generate elements which have to go into these
sets. You can of course modify their contents, but it is not allowed to rename them, delete
them or move them.

Visualization
A lot of tools exist in TopSolid that allow you to show or hide the different elements of your
design. Three icons in particular, are more dedicated to the Quick visualization of your parting
elements. They function as On and Off switches and are found on the Split tab, towards the
right side of the screen. They are also always available in the right click contextual menu.
With a right-click in the graphical area, (in a neutral mode), you will get access to the different
functions and visualizations shortcuts of this add-in:



Strip Layout Design Guide de l’utilisateur TopSolid’Design
Strip Layout Design

Introduction
The TopSolid'Strip module lets you design the strips made by progressive dies (or the
forming stages carried out by tranfer dies) for sheet metal part production.
As well as allowing you to define the part manufacturing process, the strip is used as the
design basis for the die and the draft creation.
Based on the geometry of the part to be manufactured, the starting point is usually to identify
and define the geometries for the different part forming stages. The next step is to create the
strip based on these geometries. The final step in the strip design is to define and apply the
punching operations that will progressively cut the part out of the strip.
Preparing the workpiece

Whether the part to be manufactured is directly designed with TopSolid or comes from an
external CAD system, it can be imported using TopSolid’s standard import and conversion
modules.
In any case, the result will be a Part document.

Guide de l’utilisateur TopSolid’Design Strip Layout Design
To retrieve any external geometry, you need to:

• Check the part geometry and repair it if necessary,
• Analyze the part geometry and simplify it if necessary.

You also need to ensure that the definition of the sheet metal part to be produced follows good
design practices for such parts.
Some particular features may present challenges:
• Non-uniform thickness,
• Inconsistent internal and external bending radii,
• Side faces that are non-orthogonal to sheet metal faces.
One of the key steps is to convert the model to a sheet metal part using the Sheet Metal
Recognition command.
To make it easy to position the part in the strip, it is recommended that you position and
publish a frame. However, you can skip this step and position the part using the assembly
standard positioning procedures.

The strip layout study can be started.
Inclusion in the strip document

The strip layout is defined in a Strip document.
Once you’ve created a new Strip document, the first step is to include the workpiece in the
document. As with assembly, you can drag-and-drop the part document to the strip document.
If a positioning frame is published in the part document, a frame on frame positioning

(published frame on absolute frame) will be automatically applied to the part. Otherwise, you
will need to use the TopSolid’s assembly standard positioning constraints to place the part in
the Strip document.
Positioning must be done in relation to the document’s absolute frame, with the XY plane
representing the plane of the die on which the strip (or the part) will be placed. The part
thickness must be above the XY plane (along Z+).
The X axis represents the strip’s progression axis (along X+ or X+).

The material and unfolding rules are automatically inherited from the part document.
You can insert more than one part in the strip and the same part can be included several
times.
The parts included in the strip document are used to create work shapes called shapes to
strip. They are included in the Shapes To Strip set
All these actions are performed in the document’s Preparation stage.
Defining the station shapes

One of the key tasks in the strip layout design is to define the different station shapes that will
describe the sheet metal part forming process, based on the shape to strip.
This is usually achieved be defining the station shapes in reverse production order, starting
from the final shape of sheet metal part to its unfolding shape.
The station shapes do not represent the whole strip, but only the operating parts of the strip.
However, in somes cases, it can be useful to include some of the strip in the station shape
definition to make the strip design process easier. These portions of strip can be areas that will
be bent to orient the part in stamping operations.

All of these operations are carried out in the strip document’s Stations Preparation stage.
As the name suggests, you can use the Station Shape command to create station shape.
Once the first station shape has been created, you need to unfold the part step by step using
appropiate operations available in TopSolid.
Several main types of operations exist:
• Bend undending operations,
• Forming flange unfolding and unstamping operations,

• general solid and surface operations,

• Sheet metal operations that can be applied to the shape to strip.
Please refer to the TopSolid online help for more information on how these commands work.
Each time the geometry of the shape to strip corresponds to a forming stage of the part, you
have to isolate it using the Station shape command again.
This command copies the shape to strip in its current state and places the resulting shape in
the Stations Preparation Shapes set.
The Stations Shapes Management command gives an overall view of all the station shapes
already defined and what the corresponding forming process is.
This command is very useful and also provides other services, such as the ability to rename
the station shapes, compare the geometries between two successive station shapes (and thus

see the areas affected by the forming process) or navigate through the operations involved in
the station definition).
The last station shape must match the sheet metal part unfolding.
This unfolding must actually be flat. Areas that are not in the unfolding’s main plane will not be
included in the strip layout.
The Shape To Strip replacing command includes a Flattening mode that lets you ensure that
the final unfolding is completely flat.

Creating the strip

When you are finished defining the stations shapes, you can create the strip.
The Strip Design command can be used to create or edit the strip.
This command lets you define the dimensions that you want for the strip by specifying the
width, the minimum step between two stations and the required number of stations.
With this command you can also define the position of the unfolded part in the strip and how it
is oriented, and adjust the position of each station shape in the strip.
At this stage, the strip is a composite element consisting of the station shape positioning on
the one hand, and the strip skeleton on the other.
Sketching stations are assigned to the strip. They are composed of a sketch that will be ideally
used as a basis for defining.

At any time, you can edit the strip driving parameters for adding stations or moving a forming
stage, for example, in order to provide location for cutting positioning.
All of these operations are carried out in the strip document’s Modeling stage.
Defining the punching operations

To complete the strip definition, you need to identify which punching operations will gradually
cut the part out of the strip and allow the forming operations to be carried out properly.
All of these operations are done in the strip document’s Modeling stage.
Defining a punching operation is usually done in two stages.

First, you need to define the contour(s) that will make up the punch cutting area. This is
achieved using the Punching Sketch command.
Next, you have to use the sketch-related commands and the profiles provided on the
sketching stations to define the geometry of the punching profiles.
The next step is to perform the punching operation based on these profiles.
Basically, you need to choose on the strip the target station where you want to apply the
punching operation.
The resulting cutting will be automatically applied to the rest of the strip.
This operation creates a section where the punching is located, which will be used to define
the bending punch and die set.
This operation also enables you to produce flat shapes based on the sketching stations in
order to represent the overlapped successive cuttings, and thus progressively ensure that the
part will be completely cut out of the strip through the different punching operations.

By default, the punching operations are carried out on the strip skeleton.
In some special cases, it is possible, and necessary, to operate the parts.
The strip skeleton is like any other shape that can be modified by performing other operations.
For example, you can apply Standard Forming or Stiffener operations.
Remember that you can edit the strip definition at any time for adding stations or moving a
forming stage in order to provide location for cutting positioning.
Once the punching operations are done, the strip definition stage can be considered as
completed.
You can then use it to:
• PProduce the merged strip and calculate the cutting forces.
• Draft the strip.
• Design the die.
Computing the merged strip and extracting the cutting forces

The merged strip is produced at the end of the design phase by joining the strip skeleton and
the station shapes.
The merged strip provides a shape which realistically models the strip that will pass through
the die.
In addition, it is required to compute the cutting forces.
Because it is time-consuming, the merged strip computation is done in a particular stage, the
Merged Strip stage, which prevents it from getting systematically updated when working on
the strip layout design.

Similarly, the merged strip is only created upon request and can be updated automatically or
manually.
The Strp Properties command generates an analysis operation that computes the cutting
forces based on the punching operations and the material characteristics (the shear modulus
must be provided in the part’s material definition).
This command also extracts the corresponding cutting length, the center of the cutting forces
and the progression step of the strip.
All these values are stored in parameters managed by the PDM that can subsequently be
used in a drafting or BOM document.
This operation is created in the strip document’s Analysis stage.
Representations
The representations of a strip document contain all the elements needed to properly use the
strip.
The Detailed and Simplified representations include the composite strip, i.e the station
shapes and the strip skeleton.
The Design representation contains the composite strip, including the station shapes and the
strip skeleton, and also the in-place punching sections, so that thay can be used for
defining the cutting punch and die set.
Finaly, the Merged Strip representation contains the merged strip and the in-place punching
sections.
The content of these representations can be modified as necessary in the usual way.
You can usually use either the Design or Merged representation to generate the strip unfolding
and to create the die, as described in the next two chapters.
Drafting
The strip can be drafted as a standard part.
It may make sense to define a specific template for the strip layout projection, in particular to
specify the default representation to be projected.
You can dimension and detail the strip in the same way as you do for a standard part.
With the Strip Note command, TopSolid provides you the capability to annotate the forming
operations carried out by the die on the strip. It works as a standard note command and if you
use it on a cutting section it will extract the associated punching force values automatically.
La bande se met en plan comme une pièce standard.

Insertion in the die assembly

The strip can be included in an assembly like any other part.
It may make sense to publish a postioning frame that help you to easily position the strip in the
die assembly.
After inclusion, you just need to choose the most appropriate representation for the die design.
We recommend you to define several sets in the die assembly:
• Strip,
• Die set,
• Stripper set,
• Punch set,
The Die set, Stripper set and Punch set must be exclusive and filled by contact.
This organization makes it possible to quickly and easily visualize and arrange the elements
(via the Parts tab) and simplifies the die drafting process.
These sets, as well as a minimal die set configuration, can be defined in a template document,
which greatly automates the creation of the die base.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Plastic Flow Analysis
Plastic Flow Analysis

Plastic Flow Analysis TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
The “TopSolid’PlasticFlow” add-in allows, according to a database which contains most of
the thermoplastic and elastomer materials of the market, to drive a rheological simulation of
your plastic part. To help us in this computation, we use the Cadmould Essential software
technology, created by the company Simcon. With this integrated tool, you can, from the first
step of your design, validate your conception intention, and refine it during the advancement of
your design.
The purpose of this chapter is to introduce how to prepare a rheological analysis in the plastics
domain, with TopSolid’PlasticFlow. This application is intended for users who do not
necessarily have a high level of knowledge in the rheology domain. Its intuitive interface
guides them along in establishing the model for analysis. The analysis must be conducted on
a single part designed or imported in a part document. The same application has a post-
processing tool. It allows users to see the different results from the analysis. These results are
generated and stored in a results document.
Caution: Calculation results may be indicative of or affected by errors (e.g. because its
approximations cause it to fall outside the domain of validity). When working with critical
products, you must always verify them with another software program. (If both give the same
result, it is probably accurate.). In addition, even if the result is correct, it is possible that
simplifications made when you modeled the product are not verified in reality. You should
always test the final product in real (or even extreme) situations before making it available to
the user risk-free.
Preparation
A Plastic Flow analysis preparation document contains two mains stages, listed here in
chronological order:
• Modeling stage: this stage contains the included part document to analyze.
• Definition stage: this stage includes all of the operations for developing a Plastic Flow
model, or more specifically the definition of the material to use, the position of the injection
points, and the injection process definition.
Wizard
The wizard helps ensure the validity of an analysis (e.g. the materials are well-defined,
injection points well positioned, injection process correctly defined). It also allows direct
access to a menu command, and enables you to define missing information identified in the
wizard by a red flag. This tool can be launched from the "Analysis > Wizard…" menu.

Material
The material is applied in the part document. The information below must be set:
• A match with the Cadmould material database is mandatory. During a material definition
please go in the “Tools > Cadmould Material”, select your material in the Cadmould
database, and apply its Identifier to the TopSolid Design Material. This identifier is unique
and required.
This data is required to properly solve the analysis and define the injection process.
Injection Points
Position your injection point(s) on the shape to analyze.
Caution: Points must be positioned on a surface of the part.
TopSolid’PlasticFlow is not limited in its number of injection points. Positions can be defined
during the execution of the wizard, or you can select previously created points. You can define
points directly from the wizard, or with the “Analysis > Injection point” menu command.

Process Parameters
You must set the Parameters linked to your Injection process to achieve the analysis. If you
don’t know the values, you can start by selecting the “Recommended values” button. This will
help you to enter some settings, according to the material of the part. You can define
parameters directly through the wizard, or with the “Analysis > Process Parameters” menu
command.
Solver
Once having all conditions successfully validated (it means that all the red flags had been
switched to green flags), you can launch the solver function. TopSolid’PlasticFlow creates a
new « Rheologic Analysis Result » document to compute the part meshing and the different
results related to the analysis.
Results
In the « Rheologic Analysis Result » document you can see, with the command “Results >
Results display”, the different available analyses:
• Cavity: the part without simulation.

• Thickness: according to a gradient range, you can check the different areas of the part
and analyze the global thickness for the selected geometry. Too heavy of a difference in the
displayed values shows you where the potential problem is.
• Flow front – Time: an animation allows visualizing the material progress in the blocks. It is
possible to know when the material reaches a position according to the displayed color
range.

• Flow front - Temperature: with this result it is possible to know the material temperature
when this material reaches this point for the first time.
• Pressure: according to a gradient range, you can know the pressure of the material, at a
given time and place. The more that you fill the blocks, the more the entry pressure
increases; it allows reaching the bottom of the cavity more easily.

• Filling problem: allows visualizing the potential part defects during the blocks filling.
• Ejection time: allows knowing the needed time for the material to be solid, at a specific
place. So the maximum time is the full time to get a solid shape.



TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Searches
Searches

Searches TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
When looking for a document, you can always open the projects and libraries and browse their
contents using the project tree.
This can take a long time, however, because there might be a lot of data to look through, and
at some point it could no longer be practical.
To address this issue, TopSolid has a search option available, which lets you very quickly
search documents against certain criteria.
Window
Searches are performed using the "Search" tool window, which can be displayed using the
"TopSolid > View > Search" command.
This window is divided into several areas, with the main sections identified below:
Simple search Search document types Search locations
Match case Search result
The search results will be displayed in various ways in the "search results" area.
By default, they are presented in columns. You can add or remove columns by "right-clicking"
on a column title.
The "simple search" field lets you input text to be searched for in some columns. When you
click on this field to enter text, a button appears in the column title. When the button is pressed
(orange icon background), the search is also done in this column.
Search by name No search by description or part number
This type of search can be case sensitive (i.e. differentiating uppercase and lowercase
characters) when the "Match Case" button is pressed.
You can limit the search to certain types of documents by using the "search document types"
field.

For example, if you are only looking for materials and coatings, you should check only those
types.
Coatings Materials
You must specify where to perform the search, which is done using the "search locations"
drop-down list. By default, the search is performed on all projects, but you can restrict it to limit
the number of results. Additionally, you can specify whether it should also search in referenced
projects and libraries, based on whether the button after the drop-down list is pressed.
Once the various parameters have been set up, press the "Refresh" button to update the
results.
When necessary, a yellow warning triangle appears on the icon, which means that the
currently displayed results may not match the defined search.
Thumbnails
By default, the results are presented in columns, such as the following example for a search of
material names containing the letter "B":
It is also possible to display the results as "Thumbnails", by clicking the "Thumbnails" icon.

Previews
If you want a detailed display in columns along with the ability to view a result document, you
can display its preview by clicking the "Preview" icon.
You then see a display as shown below:
Criteria
Simple searches are often too limited and do not make it possible to get good results.
You can perform advanced searches that can contain search criteria.
To do this, you have to display the advanced search criteria by clicking on the icon with the
double arrows:
Advanced search Search criteria
Then, you can enter criteria by selecting a property, an operator, and then a value.

For example, if you are looking for a hexagonal head with ISO metric threading and a nominal
diameter of 8mm, you can enter the following criteria:
Search criteria
Stacked results
When the results contain items from the same family, they are stacked and accessible via a
drop-down list, keeping the display cleaner.
Sorting
When a search returns a large number of results, it can be difficult to look through them,
regardless of how they are presented.
You can then sort the documents in order, with each level corresponding to the value of a
column.
To do this, simply select the column title and drag-drop it to the sorting area.
A tree appears to the left, corresponding to the "folders" in the hierarchy, with the results
displayed to the right, arranged by folder.

For example, using this method, you can sort the screws by nominal length:
Sorting area
Sort folders tree Results for each folder
Templates
When you perform a non-trivial search, you may have to enter some criteria and define a
sorting order.
This can take substantial time, time you don't want to spend again doing the same search or a
similar search in the future.
To avoid this, you can save the search and then perform a new search by using this last
search as a template via commands that are available to the left of the window's toolbar.
Virtual Documents
Some documents do not correspond to actual objects, and you'll want to be sure that they are
not returned during a search. Otherwise, they may clutter an already large list of results.
For example, this is the case when you make a generic part to define a family of parts . The
parts in the family are actual parts, but the generic part does not correspond to a usable part in
an assembly.
To tell TopSolid that this part is not real, you have to declare it as being virtual.

This is done using the "TopSolid > File > Virtual Document..." command, which is generally
used to declare any document as being virtual.
Filters
Following the same principle as when search criteria is defined, you can define filters to help
clean up the view of the assembly or drafting.
To do this, create a special "Filter" document, located in the "Advanced" tab in the document
creation command.


TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Client-Server PDM
Client-Server PDM

Client-Server PDM TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
Introduction
To allow several people to work on the same projects, you have to use the PDM in client-
server mode.
To do this, you should dedicate a machine on the network to be the server and install
TopSolid'Pdm Server on it.
It is not advisable to use this machine to work with TopSolid’Design at the same time, because
this would slow down the server access for the other users.
This server should be a computer with a decent amount of power, so most current machines
may be used. It must have a good memory capacity (>= 8 GB) and a lot of available disk
space (> 300 GB to be stable over time, for normal use with less than ten workstations).
See the Installation guide or consult the www.topsolid.com website for more details regarding
operating systems compatibility.
When the number of users is small enough (maximum five), it is possible not to use a
Windows Server edition, but then some errors may occur as soon as the maximum number of
allowed connections is exceeded. Therefore, this is not advised.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Client-Server PDM
Installation
Simply follow the installation procedure described in the installation guide.
Users
The first thing to do is to create a password for the admin user, using the "TopSolid > PDM >
Manage My Account..." command.
You should then create a user account for each member of the company who will need to
connect to the server using the "TopSolid > PDM >Manage Users..." command, which is
explained in detail in the online help.
Usage
Each user will then be able to work by connecting to the server with their own user account.
The working method is very much like working with a local PDM, except that you can work in
teams.
TopSolid is connected to a single PDM at all times, therefore when working in teams, it will not
be possible to directly access the local PDM, and vice versa.
If you would like to transfer projects between users, you should export and import them as
packages, as described earlier.
Security
If needed, security policies can be managed to restrict some users rights.
To do this, use the "TopSolid > PDM > Manage security..." command, for which the online help
Chat
A key difference from working locally is the availability of a new tool window, called "Chat".
This is an instant messaging tool that allows each user to communicate with other users
connected to the server.
Workflows
It is possible to automate the management of the life cycle of the documents, by defining rules
to apply and action to execute when changing their states or sub-states.
This functionality is called "workflow".
To define a workflow, use the "TopSolid > PDM > Manage Workflows..." command, for which
Afterwards, it will be possible to associate a workflow to a project, by selecting it in the project
tree and using the "Others > Workflow..." contextual command.
Approvals
When the life cycle of a project is managed with a workflow, some state changes of its
documents will require the "approval" of some users.
You can view all your pending approvals by using the "Approvals" tools window, which can be
displayed using the "TopSolid > View > Approvals" command.

Client-Server PDM TopSolid’Design User’s Guide

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Glossary
Glossary

Glossary TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
The definitions of key terms used in this document are listed below.
Application window: Window relating to the application.

Assembly: Set of part occurrences and assembly occurrences. Contrary to the term "Part",
which could mean "Part definition" or "Part occurrence" depending on the context, the term
"Assembly" always means "Assembly definition" (the term "Sub-assembly" is used for
assembly occurrence).
Assembly occurrence: Assembly reused in another assembly. The term "Sub-assembly" is
also used.
Background document: Document that can be viewed in a document's background.
Basic: See "Basic entity".
Basic entity: Entity not associated with any operation and therefore will never be modified
during an update resulting in another operation to be executed.
Bend: Transitional shape between two faces of sheet metal, generally obtained by bending.
A bend is characterized by its internal radius and bending angle. It is modeled by cylindrical
faces.
Bending: Process of shaping sheet metal by bending along a linear generatrix.
Bending angle: Aperture angle of a bend in a sheet metal part.
Bending Table: Parameter tables used to calculate the length of unfolded or rolled bends
while performing unbending / bending processes in the application. These tables are
organized by thickness, internal radius and bending angle. They are defined in an "Unfolding
rules" definition document.
Bill of material: Quantitative description of the assembly components used to prepare an
estimate or manufacturing order.
Bottom-up design: Assembly design method in which parts are modeled independently and
then reassembled together using positioning constraints: frame coincidence, contact between
faces, alignments...
Candidate edges: Edges detected by TopSolid’Split as possible candidates to be parting
edges.
Crunching: Process of shaping a sheet metal part by applying several successive bends.
Description: Text describing a part, an assembly or any other object to help, for example,
produce a bill of materials.
Dimpling: Process of shaping sheet metal that changes the sheet level by applying two
parallel and opposite bends.
Document window: Window relating to a document, appearing as a tabbed page within
TopSolid.
Element: Atomic part of a document that can be created, modified or deleted.
Entities tree: Window enabling you to explore all the entities in a tree view.

Entity: Type of element corresponding to what is being modeled (parameters, points, axes,
planes, frames, sketches, shapes, etc.).
ERP: Acronym for "Enterprise Resource Planning", which is a "production management"
system designed to manage the company's operational processes, such as purchasing, order
fulfillment, inventory, material requirements, etc.
FreeShape: Shape controlled by geometric constraints and not by a chronology of operations.
Hem bend: Bend in which the aperture angle equals zero or less than 0°.
In-place part: Part modeled in the assembly making use of neighboring parts. The definition
document for an in-place part is synchronized with the assembly definition document.
Insert shape: Geometric shape of the inserts included in a Split document.
Internal bend radius: Radius from the internal cylindrical face representing and
characterizing a bend.
Lateral edge: Edge separating two lateral faces of a sheet metal part.
Lateral face: Face of a sheet metal flange whose width is defined by the sheet thickness.
Layer: A part or assembly document can contain layers that can be set as visible or invisible.
An entity can then be assigned to a layer, and will not be displayed as long as the layer
remains invisible.
Library: Type of project containing documents frequently used in projects.
Local Part: Part defined locally in the assembly, and not in the independent part definition
document.
Main document: Document used to make a preview of the project in the projects explorer.
Major revision: Text that identifies the finalized state of a document. By default, major
revisions are identified using incremented letters, starting at "A".
Mechanism: Articulated assembly consisting of groups of solid parts (rigid groups) linked by
kinematic joints.
Minor revision: Text that identifies the intermediary work stage of a document. It has no
physical reality for a part since it has not been and will not be manufactured. By default, minor
revisions are identified using incremented numbers, starting at "0".
Molded shape: Geometric shape of the part to design included in a Split document, before the
shrinkage computation. It is possible to have more than one molded shape in a TopSolid’Split
document.
Operation: Type of element corresponding to actions taken to produce or modify entities

(frame creation, extrusion, fillet, drilling).
Operations tree: Window enabling you to explore all the operations in a tree view.
Options tree: Window enabling you to explore all the options associated with a document in a
tree view.
Package: File with the extension ".TopPkg" containing native TopSolid documents allowing
for the exchange of management information between two TopSolid PDM systems.

Parameter: Non geometric entity containing, depending on its type, a real, integer, boolean or
character string value. Document parameters are listed in the "Parameters" folder in the
entities tree.
Part: Mechanical part that can mean either the part definition or a part occurrence.
Part number: Text that uniquely characterizes an objet (part, assembly, plane, etc.). This is a
company-specific internal part number that will typically be used in the bill of material. Two objects
that should be considered as being the same, whether on a bill of material or in manufacturing (for
example, two parts designed in place that turn out to be identical), can have the same part number.
(The system supports the non-uniqueness of the part number.)
Part occurrence: Part reused in an assembly. The term "Part" is also more simply used, not
to be confused with the part definition.
Parting edges: Edges that define the boundaries between the parting shells.
Parting shells: Each molding elements (blocks, inserts, die shells...) will be created from
those different areas.
Pattern: Set of transformations used to define a repetition.

PDD: Product Definition Data. Commonly refers to digital shapes to manipulate in a CAD/CAM
system.
PDM: Acronym for "Product Data Management", which is a system used to manage data
securely, and specifically to control the access, sharing, retrieval and storage of data, etc.
Planar sketch: Wireframe entity contained within a plane. Also sometimes called "2D sketch".
Project: Group of documents organized in folders managed by the PDM system.
Project tree: Window enabling you to explore the contents of a project in a tree view.
Projects explorer: Window enabling you to explore all projects.
Publishing: Entity allowing a document to display numerical or geometric information, which
can then be referenced statically in another document.
Rheology: It is the science we use to analyze material flow and part deformations. With
TopSolid’PlasticFlow, we reduce the analyzing field to thermoplastic and elastomers.
Rolling angle: Angle measuring the portion around which the bend in a sheet metal part is
wrapped. The complement of the rolling angle is the bending angle.
Scenario: Set of tasks performed on a mechanism in a specific chronological order during a

simulation.
Shape: Entity containing a surface or solid geometry.
Shape to split: This is the resulting shape after the definition of molded shapes, insert shapes
and computation of the shrinkage. This shape is useful for the stock computation and the
creation of the parting edges.
Sheet metal face: Main face of sheet metal. The faces of the first side and second side, which
are opposite and parallel to each other, are distinguished by the value of their thickness.
Sheet metal operation: Shaping operation applied only on sheet metal parts.

Sheet metal part: Part possessing certain properties that allow it to be unfolded and modified
by sheet metal operations.
Shrinkage: Phenomenon affecting the “end part”. This process involves to apply a
transformation to the received PDD, computed according a shrinkage factor, global or
differential. The resulting part is the shape to split.
Spatial sketch: Wireframe entity that cannot be contained within a plane. Also sometimes
called "3D sketch".
Stage: Group of operations performed sequentially in a document. A document can be made
up of one or several stages, depending on its type.
Stamping: Process of shaping a sheet metal part by pressing it between a punch and a
stamping die. The resulting parts are generally not "developable".
Synchronized documents: Documents updated at the same time and linked together.
Task: Basic action performed on a mechanism during a simulation.
Thickness: Characteristic dimension of sheet metal corresponding to the initial thickness of a
sheet of metal used to manufacture a sheet metal part.
Tool window: Floating or anchored window within the application window providing access to
certain functions. As opposed to a dialog, this window is displayed not only when executing a
command, but stays open until it is specifically closed.
Top-down design: Assembly design method consisting of working directly in the assembly
(or in at least part of the assembly), and creating parts in their operating position by utilizing
the geometry of neighboring parts.
Unbending: Method of unfolding a sheet metal part made up of bends (cylindrical faces) and
developable surfaces (unrolled or crunched).
Unbending method: Set of parameters used to calculate the unrolled length of a bend, based
on its thickness, internal radius and bending angle. An unbending method can be defined by
three parameters:
• The type of calculation: T (neutral fiber, internal dimension, tangential internal dimension,
or tangential external dimension),
• The neutral fiber coefficient (or K-factor): K,
• The compensation: C.
The group of three parameters can be expressed by the symbols "(T, K, C)".
Unfolding: Operation of unfolding a sheet metal part or surface by unbending and/or
unstamping. This term is preferred over the term unbending, whose meaning is more
restrictive but is often misused.
Unfolding rules: Set of calculation rules used to unfold sheet metal. Includes in particular
unbending methods organized in tables.
Vault: Secure place where project documents are stored.

Viewer package: Package in which items not required for viewing objects are removed. This
file with the extension ".TopPkgViw" is smaller in size, and can be accessed using
TopSolid'Viewer.

TopSolid’Design User’s Guide Index
Index

Index TopSolid’Design User’s Guide
A
Add-in 4
Analysis Preparation
Document 274
Stages 274
Analysis Result
Document 279
Stages 279
Antialiasing 268
Application title bar 24
Application window 24
Approvals 335
Assembly 120
Articulated 120
Articulated sub-assembly 143
Assembly context 130
Assembly neighborhood 129
Collision 134
Color 124
Constraint 122
Constraint destination 123
Constraint label 123
Constraint level 124
Constraint source 123
Definition 120
Design representation 132
Detailed representation 132
Dynamic positioning 123
First inclusion 122
Forced wireframe render mode 125
Grouped positioning 124
In place 135
In place editing 126, 128, 129
Inclusion 122
Inheriting joints 143
Inheriting rigid groups 143
Layer 125
Local 136
Local modification 135
Local shape 134
Occurrence 120
Parts 122, 125
Physical properties 133
Positioning 122
Representation 132
Rigid sub-assembly 143
Simplified representation 132
Transparency 125
Attribute 56
Axis 68

Absolute 68
Folder 68
Limits 68
Orientation 69
B
Bill of Material 200
Column 200
Definition 200
Document 200
Export 201
Flat 201
Multi-levels 201
C
Camera 58
Conical perspective 264
Folder 58
Front 58
Perspective 58
System 58
Top 58
Cancel 29
Chassis 236
Clearance hole standard 220
Coating 260
Document 260
Color 57
Design 57
Command
Contextual 2, 25
Grayed 25
Menu 2, 25
Mode 25
Compass 33
Cut 58
Folder 58
D
Decimal separator 3, 30
Design
Bottom-up 120
Hybrid 121
Process 44
Top-down 121
Transparency 57
Detection 26
Echo 26
Entity 26
Turning 26
Diagnostic 4
Dialog box 28
Dialog panel 28

Dimensional tolerance standard 219

Document
Automatic part number 15
Background 134
Comment 15
Complementary part number 15
Current 26
Default template 19
Description 15
Favorite 11
File size 14
File version 14
Insertion 46
Invalid 50
Main 10
Manufacturer 15
Manufacturer part number 15
Modified 24
My Templates 12
Name 14
Open 26
Part number 15
Property 14
Synchronized 52, 128, 130, 179
Template 12, 36
Type 12
User property 15, 65
Validated 17
Virtual 154, 330
Document Template
Default 12
Document window 25
Draft
Auxiliary view 185
Border 182
Cross section view 189
Detail view 188
Detailing 189
Dimensioning 191
Exact projection 187
Fast projection 187
Format 182
Hatching 113, 189
Hide segments 190
Local cross section 189
Main Set 185
Main view 185
Note 192
Page 193
Projected view 185

Scale 183
Set 185
Standard 182
Template 185, 188
Title block 183
Tolerancing 191
Drafting 182
Drafting bundle 195
Drawing 197
Drilling 218
Boring 219
Clearance hole 218, 220
Counter Sinking 218
Direction 219
Frame 219
Group 220
Hole 218
Origin 219
Primitive 218
Screw Spot Facing 220
Sketch 220
Spot facing 218
Tapped hole 218
Tolerance 219
E
Entering
Axis 68
Direction 69
Effective value 64
Frame 71
Integer Value 65
Nominal value 64
Plane 70
Point 67
Real value 62
Tolerance 64
Entity 40
Basic 46
Basify 46
Color in the tree 40
Comment 42
Delete 42
Description 42
Displayed 41
Hide 41
Information 42
Invisible 41
Move 40
Name 41
Rename 41

Show 41
System 41
Tree 40
Unbasify 46
Visible 41
Environment 265
Exploded 206
Automatic displacement 209
Displacement 207
Document 206
Explosion line 208
Group 209
Export 19
Extruded Bar 237
Coating 238, 239
Cut 240
Definition 238
Description 238, 239
Function 239
Length 238
Material 238, 239
Trimming angle 1 238
Trimming angle 2 238
F
F1 3, 29
F2 13, 41
Family 154
Catalog 155
Code 155
Condition 157
Definition 155
Derived 160
Descriptions of instances 159
Document 154
Driver 157
Drivers folder 157
Explicit 161
Generic 154
Generic instance 158
Generics folder 155
Geometric driver 158
Geometric generics folder 158
Instance 155
Names of instances 158
Sources folder 161
Filter 58, 331
Folder 59
Forced Wireframe Render Mode 58
Frame 70
Absolute 71

Coordinate system 70
Folder 71
FreeShape 102
Constraint level 104
Conversion 102
Editing 104
Fully constrained 104
Import 102
Modification 103
Operation 102
Under-constrained 104
Function 167
Definition 167
Document 167
Family 168
Folder 167
Library 168
Mechanism 168
Provide 167
Providing 167
H
Help 29
I
Import 19
Input
Graphic 30
Keyboard 29
K
Keyboard shortcuts 36
Kinematics 120
L
Language 3
Layer 57
Attribute 57
Folder 57
Visibility 57
Library 10
Explorer 10
License 11
Read-only 11
Startup 3
TopSolid AFNOR Mechanical 10
TopSolid ANSI Mechanical 10
TopSolid CEN Mechanical 10
TopSolid DIN Mechanical 10
TopSolid ISO Mechanical 11
TopSolid Mechanical 10
TopSolid Textures 10, 11
Update 11
Light 262

Ambient 262
Beam 262
Directional 262
Point 262
Shadow 263
Sky 262
Spot 262
Local PDM
Backup 9
Location 9
Restoration 9
Transfer 9
M
Material 254
Appearance 256
Bill of material 255
Color 256
Deformation 256
Description 255
Document 254
Elasticity 255
Form 254
Fresnel reflection 259
Hardness 255
Index of refraction 257
Name 255
Parameter 254
Part number 255
Preview 256
Reflection coefficient 257
Reflection spreading angle 258
Refraction spreading angle 259
Specular shininess 256
Specular spreading 257
Specularity type 256
Texture 256
Transparency coefficient 257
Mechanism 120, 138
Configuration 141
Configurations folder 141
Constrained configuration 142
Current configuration 141
Current rigid group 139
Deactivate joint 140
Degree of freedom 138
Design configuration 141
Folder 138
Ground group 139
Isostatic 141
Joint 139

Joints folder 139

Kinematics 138
Nonholonomic joint 142
Overconstrained 140
Rigid group 138
Rigid groups folder 138
Stage 138
Unilateral joint 140
Menu 2
Context 25
Main 24
Missler Software 2
Mounting 212
Animation 215
Notice 214
Stage 213
Unmounting 212
Video 215
Mouse wheel 32
N
Nesting 233
O
Offline 20
OK 29
Online Help 3
Operation 44
Chronology 44, 125
Color in the tree 44
Comment 45
Composite 47
Condition 46
Deactivable 45
Deactivate 45
Definition 48
Delete 45
Description 45
Edit 48
Folder 47
Generated 53
Grayed 45
Information 45
Insertion 46
Invalid 50
Move 47
Option 53
Rebuild 52
Rename 45
Replace 46
Starting 47
Tolerance 54

Tree 44
Option 36
Application 36
Colors 36
Document 36
Tree 37
P
Package 19
Parameter 62
Code 160
External 64
Family 159
Folder 62
Formula 62
Integer 65
Internal 63
Project 64
Real 62
Relay 63
Threading pitch 220
Part 110
Asymmetrical 114
Center of mass 113
Coating 112, 133
Definition 110
Derived 114
Design representation 111
Detailed representation 110
Empty 110
Fibers 113
Generic 154
In place 121, 126
Local 132
Mass 110, 113
Material 112, 133
Mirror 115
Moments of inertia 113
Multi-shape 110
Occurrence 110
Partial 116
Physical properties 113
Redimensionned 114
Replacement 164
Representation 110
Simplified representation 111
Special 131
Surface 113
Symmetrical 114
Symmetry 115
Tolerancing 116

Unsectionable 116
Virtual 154
Volume 113
Pattern 72
PDM 8
Archiving 16
Change 16
Client-server 334
History 17
Impacting 19
Integrated 8
Local 8
Purge 16
Transparent 8
Vault 16
PDM server
Chat 335
Security 335
User 335
Pinned 29
Piping 244
Definition 249
Elbow 244, 250
Insert 248, 251
Line 244
Neutral fiber 247
Sketch 244
Tube 244, 250
Plane 70
Absolute 70
Folder 70
Limits 70
Point 66
Absolute 66
Folder 66
Preview 25
Process 176
Dedicated 179
Definition 176
Document 176
Driver 178
Functions folder 176
Operation 179
Operator 178
Operators folder 178
Target shape 177
Project 9
Document 10, 12, 15
Explorer 10
Folder 10, 11
My templates 12
New 10
Preview 10
Property 15
Recycle bin 14
References 11
Template 12
Tree 10
Publishing 164
Description 164
Folder 164
Name 164
Orientation 168
Visibility 166
R
Redo 31
Refreshing 52
Rendering mode 32
Revision 17
Llife cycle 18
Major 17
Minor 17
State 17
Sub-state 18
S
Screw Spot Facing Standard 220
Search 326
Advanced 328
Criteria 328
Preview 328
Refresh 327
Result 326
Simple 326
Sort 329
Stacked results 329
Thumbnails 327
Selection 25
Clear 26
Colored echo 31
Echo 26
In the tree 41
Multiple 26
Rectangular 26
Set 72
Current 73
Folder 72
Shape 96
Absorbed 97
Body 96
Boolean 98
Border edge 96
Boss 98

Chamfer 98
Closed 96
Creation 97
Edge 96
Extruded 97
Face 96
Fillet 98
Folder 98
Healing 98
Insert 282, 286
Loop 96
Molded 282, 285
Multi-body 96
Open 96
Pocket 98
Primitive solid 97
Repetition 98
Revolved 97
Solid 96
Surface 96
Tool 98
Vertex 96
Sheet metal
Bend 225
Hopper 224
Lateral edge 225
Lateral face 225
Metalworking 224
Multi-shape 224
Operation 225
Parameter 224
Part 224
Shape 224
Thickness 224
Unbending method 226
Unfolding 228
Unfolding rules 226
Simulation 146
Collision 150
Configuration 150
Deactivate force 149
Dynamic 146, 149
Force 149
Forces folder 149
Joint driving 146
Kinematics 146, 148
Measurement 150
Measurements folder 150
Motorized joint 146
Passive joint 146

Play 148
Scenario 147
Scenarios folder 147
Simulations folder 148
Task 146
Tasks folder 146
Track 147
Velocities folder 149
Velocity 149
Video 150
Wireframe kinematics 149
Sketch 76
2D 76
3D 76
Active dimension 82
Axis of revolution 83
Building 87
Centered dimension 81
Checking 88
Constraint 80
Constraint level 82
Construction geometry 79
Curve 78
Dimension 80
Editing 76, 84
Equation 85
First 76
Folder 76
Frame 76
Fully constrained 82
Input grid 77
Internal geometry 80
Magnetic grid 77
Mono-segment profile 78
Open profile 78
Operation 86
Over-constrained 82
Planar 76
Point 79
Positioning 76
Profile 78
Projection 81
Relation 80
Section 79
Segment 78
Sewing 78
Solving 87
Spatial 76
Text 89
Under-constrained 82

Variable 85
Vertex 78
Spatial Sketch 92
Input Plane 93
Plane 92
SQL Server
Compact Edition 9
Stage 48
Analysis 110, 120
Annotation 110, 120
Automatic 49
Background 182
Chronology 48
Current 48
Draft 182
Mechanism 120
Modeling 110, 120
Start page 27
Status bar 25
Style 186
Assembly view 186
Current 187
Normal 186
Part view 186
View 186
T
Texture 264
Threading standard 219
Tool windows 25
TopSolid 2
TopSolid’Design 2, 4
TopSolid’Drafting 4
TopSolid’Fea 4, 274
TopSolid’Interop 4
TopSolid’Interop’AutoCad 4
TopSolid’Pdm 4, 8
TopSolid’PlasticFlow 318
TopSolid’Smi 230
TopSolid’Split 282
TopSolid’Viewer 20
Transform 71
Transparency
Design 57
U
Undo 31
Update
Auto 51
Full 52
Heal 52
Manual 51

V
Version 4
View
Active 32
Graphical 31
Viewer 20
Viewer package 20
Visualization 59
Folder 59
Option 56
Tolerance 56
W
Weld 241
Wizard 171
Constraints folder 171
Dedicated 173
Definition 171
Destination 173
Document 171
Operation 172
Rule 172
Rules folder 172
Source 171
Workflow 335
Working bar 24
www.topsolid7.com 20

20203-1309 TopSolid&#39;Design User&#39;s Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

20203-1309 TopSolid&#39;Design User&#39;s Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User's Guide

© 2014, Missler Software.

This information is subject to change without warning.

TopSolid® is a registered trademark of Missler Software.

TopSolid® is a product name of Missler Software.

Missler Software iii

Spatial Sketches .................................................................................. 91

FreeShapes ........................................................................................ 101

Parts .................................................................................................... 109

Derived Parts ................................................................................................................ 114

Assemblies ......................................................................................... 119

Mechanisms ....................................................................................... 137

Missler Software vii

Inheritance .................................................................................................................... 143

Simulations ........................................................................................ 145

Families .............................................................................................. 153

Functions ............................................................................................ 163

Wizards ............................................................................................... 169

viii Missler Software

Rules ............................................................................................................................. 172

Processes ........................................................................................... 175

Drafting ............................................................................................... 181

Drafting bundle .................................................................................. 195

Drawings ............................................................................................. 197

Bills of Material .................................................................................. 199

Exploded ............................................................................................. 205

Mountings ........................................................................................... 211

Drillings .............................................................................................. 217

Sheet Metal ......................................................................................... 223

Nesting ................................................................................................ 233

Chassis ............................................................................................... 235

Piping .................................................................................................. 243

Materials ............................................................................................. 253

Realistic Rendering ........................................................................... 261

Analysis .............................................................................................. 273

Split Blocks ........................................................................................ 281

Strip Layout Design ........................................................................... 303

Plastic Flow Analysis ........................................................................ 317

xii Missler Software

Preparation .................................................................................................................... 318

Searches ............................................................................................. 325

Client-Server PDM ............................................................................. 333

Glossary ............................................................................................. 337

Index ................................................................................................... 343

Missler Software xiii

xiv Missler Software

A project contains documents, which may be arranged hierarchically in folders (like in

• TopSolid ISO Mechanical: Contains ISO standard components (international standard).

value of this property is equivalent to renaming the document, as discussed earlier.

Automatic Part Numbering

Application icon Main menu Title bar Working bar

Active keyboard field

Active graphic field

Current stage Current stage change

It is important to know how to get out of this kind of situation.

Default attributes setting

Forced Wireframe Render Modes

Deactivate All Filters

Entering Real Values

Tolerancing Real Values

Entering Integer Values

Advanced input and

Existing points and frames

There are several possible ways to enter this:

20203-1309 TopSolid'Design User's Guide

20203-1309 TopSolid'Design User's Guide